Compositions and methods for the therapy and diagnosis of prostate cancer

ABSTRACT

Compositions and methods for the therapy and diagnosis of cancer, such as prostate cancer, are disclosed. Compositions may comprise one or more prostate-specific proteins, immunogenic portions thereof, or polynucleotides that encode such portions. Alternatively, a therapeutic composition may comprise an antigen presenting cell that expresses a prostate-specific protein, or a T cell that is specific for cells expressing such a protein. Such compositions may be used, for example, for the prevention and treatment of diseases such as prostate cancer. Diagnostic methods based on detecting a prostate-specific protein, or mRNA encoding such a protein, in a sample are also provided.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/570,737, filed May 12, 2000, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,202,342, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/568,100, filed May 9, 2000, now abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/536,857, filed Mar. 27, 2000, now abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/483,672, filed Jan. 14, 2000, now abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/439,313, filed Nov. 12, 1999, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,329,505, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/352,616, filed Jul. 13, 1999, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,395,278, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/288,946, filed Apr. 9, 1999, now abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/232,149, filed Jan. 15, 1999, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,465,611, which is a continuation in part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/159,812, filed Sep. 23, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,613,872, which is a continuation in part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/115,453, filed Jul. 14, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,657,056, which is a continuation in part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/030,607, filed Feb. 25, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,262,245, which is a continuation in part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/020,956, filed Feb. 9, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,261,562, which is a continuation in part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/904,804, filed Aug. 1, 1997, now abandoned, which is a continuation in part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/806,099, filed Feb. 25, 1997, now abandoned.

TECHNICAL FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates generally to therapy and diagnosis of cancer, such as prostate cancer. The invention is more specifically related to polypeptides comprising at least a portion of a prostate-specific protein, and to polynucleotides encoding such polypeptides. Such polypeptides and polynucleotides may be used in compositions for prevention and treatment of prostate cancer, and for the diagnosis and monitoring of such cancers.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Cancer is a significant health problem throughout the world. Although Cancer is a significant health problem throughout the world. Although advances have been made in detection and therapy of cancer, no vaccine or other universally successful method for prevention or treatment is currently available. Current therapies, which are generally based on a combination of chemotherapy or surgery and radiation, continue to prove inadequate in many patients.

Prostate cancer is the most common form of cancer among males, with an estimated incidence of 30% in men over the age of 50. Overwhelming clinical evidence shows that human prostate cancer has the propensity to metastasize to bone, and the disease appears to progress inevitably from androgen dependent to androgen refractory status, leading to increased patient mortality. This prevalent disease is currently the second leading cause of cancer death among men in the U.S.

In spite of considerable research into therapies for the disease, prostate cancer remains difficult to treat. Commonly, treatment is based on surgery and/or radiation therapy, but these methods are ineffective in a significant percentage of cases. Two previously identified prostate specific proteins—prostate specific antigen (PSA) and prostatic acid phosphatase (PAP)—have limited therapeutic and diagnostic potential. For example, PSA levels do not always correlate well with the presence of prostate cancer, being positive in a percentage of non-prostate cancer cases, including benign prostatic hyperplasia (BPH). Furthermore, PSA measurements correlate with prostate volume, and do not indicate the level of metastasis.

In spite of considerable research into therapies for these and other cancers, prostate cancer remains difficult to diagnose and treat effectively. Accordingly, there is a need in the art for improved methods for detecting and treating such cancers. The present invention fulfills these needs and further provides other related advantages.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

Briefly stated, the present invention provides compositions and methods for the diagnosis and therapy of cancer, such as prostate cancer. In one aspect, the present invention provides polypeptides comprising at least a portion of a prostate-specific protein, or a variant thereof. Certain portions and other variants are immunogenic, such that the ability of the variant to react with antigen-specific antisera is not substantially diminished. Within certain embodiments, the polypeptide comprises a sequence that is encoded by a polynucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of: (a) sequences recited in SEQ ID NO: 1-111, 115-171, 173-175, 177, 179-305, 307-315, 326, 328, 330, 332-335, 340-375, 381, 382 and 384-476, 524, 526, 530, 531, 533, 535, 536, 552, 569-572, 587, 591, 593-606, 618-705, 709-774, 777 and 789; (b) variants of a sequence recited in SEQ ID NO: 1-111, 115-171, 173-175, 177, 179-305, 307-315, 326, 328, 330, 332-335, 340-375, 381, 382 and 384-476, 524, 526, 530, 531, 533, 535, 536, 552, 569-572, 587, 591, 593-606, 618-705, 709-774, 777 and 789; and (c) complements of a sequence of (a) or (b). In specific embodiments, the polypeptides of the present invention comprise at least a portion of a tumor protein that includes an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of sequences recited in SEQ ID NO: 112-114, 172, 176, 178, 327, 329, 331, 336, 339, 376-380, 383, 477-483, 496, 504, 505, 519, 520, 522, 525, 527, 532, 534, 537-551, 553-568, 573-586, 588-590, 592, 706-708, 775, 776, 778 and 780, and variants thereof.

The present invention further provides polynucleotides that encode a polypeptide as described above, or a portion thereof (such as a portion encoding at least 15 amino acid residues of a prostate-specific protein), expression vectors comprising such polynucleotides and host cells transformed or transfected with such expression vectors.

Within other aspects, the present invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a polypeptide or polynucleotide as described above and a physiologically acceptable carrier.

Within a related aspect of the present invention, immunogenic compositions, or vaccines for prophylactic or therapeutic use are provided. Such compositions comprise a polypeptide or polynucleotide as described above and an immunostimulant.

The present invention further provides pharmaceutical compositions that comprise: (a) an antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof that specifically binds to a prostate-specific protein; and (b) a physiologically acceptable carrier.

Within further aspects, the present invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising: (a) an antigen presenting cell that expresses a polypeptide as described above and (b) a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient. Antigen presenting cells include dendritic cells, macrophages, monocytes, fibroblasts and B cells.

Within related aspects, immunogenic compositions, or vaccines, are provided that comprise: (a) an antigen presenting cell that expresses a polypeptide as described above and (b) an immunostimulant.

The present invention further provides, in other aspects, fusion proteins that comprise at least one polypeptide as described above, as well as polynucleotides encoding such fusion proteins.

Within related aspects, pharmaceutical compositions comprising a fusion protein, or a polynucleotide encoding a fusion protein, in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier are provided.

Compositions are further provided, within other aspects, that comprise a fusion protein, or a polynucleotide encoding a fusion protein, in combination with an immunostimulant.

Within further aspects, the present invention provides methods for inhibiting the development of a cancer in a patient, comprising administering to a patient a composition as recited above. The patient may be afflicted with prostate cancer, in which case the methods provide treatment for the disease, or patient considered at risk for such a disease may be treated prophylactically.

The present invention further provides, within other aspects, methods for removing tumor cells from a biological sample, comprising contacting a biological sample with T cells that specifically react with a prostate-specific protein, wherein the step of contacting is performed under conditions and for a time sufficient to permit the removal of cells expressing the protein from the sample.

Within related aspects, methods are provided for inhibiting the development of a cancer in a patient, comprising administering to a patient a biological sample treated as described above.

Methods are further provided, within other aspects, for stimulating and/or expanding T cells specific for a prostate-specific protein, comprising contacting T cells with one or more of: (i) a polypeptide as described above; (ii) a polynucleotide encoding such a polypeptide; and/or (iii) an antigen presenting cell that expresses such a polypeptide; under conditions and for a time sufficient to permit the stimulation and/or expansion of T cells. Isolated T cell populations comprising T cells prepared as described above are also provided.

Within further aspects, the present invention provides methods for inhibiting the development of a cancer in a patient, comprising administering to a patient an effective amount of a T cell population as described above.

The present invention further provides methods for inhibiting the development of a cancer in a patient, comprising the steps of: (a) incubating CD4⁺ and/or CD8⁺ T cells isolated from a patient with one or more of: (i) a polypeptide comprising at least an immunogenic portion of a prostate-specific protein; (ii) a polynucleotide encoding such a polypeptide; and (iii) an antigen-presenting cell that expressed such a polypeptide; and (b) administering to the patient an effective amount of the proliferated T cells, and thereby inhibiting the development of a cancer in the patient. Proliferated cells may, but need not, be cloned prior to administration to the patient.

Within further aspects, the present invention provides methods for determining the presence or absence of a cancer in a patient, comprising: (a) contacting a biological sample obtained from a patient with a binding agent that binds to a polypeptide as recited above; (b) detecting in the sample an amount of polypeptide that binds to the binding agent; and (c) comparing the amount of polypeptide with a predetermined cut-off value, and therefrom determining the presence or absence of a cancer in the patient. Within preferred embodiments, the binding agent is an antibody, more preferably a monoclonal antibody. The cancer may be prostate cancer.

The present invention also provides, within other aspects, methods for monitoring the progression of a cancer in a patient. Such methods comprise the steps of: (a) contacting a biological sample obtained from a patient at a first point in time with a binding agent that binds to a polypeptide as recited above; (b) detecting in the sample an amount of polypeptide that binds to the binding agent; (c) repeating steps (a) and (b) using a biological sample obtained from the patient at a subsequent point in time; and (d) comparing the amount of polypeptide detected in step (c) with the amount detected in step (b) and therefrom monitoring the progression of the cancer in the patient.

The present invention further provides, within other aspects, methods for determining the presence or absence of a cancer in a patient, comprising the steps of: (a) contacting a biological sample obtained from a patient with an oligonucleotide that hybridizes to a polynucleotide that encodes a prostate-specific protein; (b) detecting in the sample a level of a polynucleotide, preferably mRNA, that hybridizes to the oligonucleotide; and (c) comparing the level of polynucleotide that hybridizes to the oligonucleotide with a predetermined cut-off value, and therefrom determining the presence or absence of a cancer in the patient. Within certain embodiments, the amount of mRNA is detected via polymerase chain reaction using, for example, at least one oligonucleotide primer that hybridizes to a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide as recited above, or a complement of such a polynucleotide. Within other embodiments, the amount of mRNA is detected using a hybridization technique, employing an oligonucleotide probe that hybridizes to a polynucleotide that encodes a polypeptide as recited above, or a complement of such a polynucleotide.

In related aspects, methods are provided for monitoring the progression of a cancer in a patient, comprising the steps of: (a) contacting a biological sample obtained from a patient with an oligonucleotide that hybridizes to a polynucleotide that encodes a prostate-specific protein; (b) detecting in the sample an amount of a polynucleotide that hybridizes to the oligonucleotide; (c) repeating steps (a) and (b) using a biological sample obtained from the patient at a subsequent point in time; and (d) comparing the amount of polynucleotide detected in step (c) with the amount detected in step (b) and therefrom monitoring the progression of the cancer in the patient.

Within further aspects, the present invention provides antibodies, such as monoclonal antibodies, that bind to a polypeptide as described above, as well as diagnostic kits comprising such antibodies. Diagnostic kits comprising one or more oligonucleotide probes or primers as described above are also provided.

These and other aspects of the present invention will become apparent upon reference to the following detailed description and attached drawings. All references disclosed herein are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety as if each was incorporated individually.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS AND SEQUENCE IDENTIFIERS

FIG. 1 illustrates the ability of T cells to kill fibroblasts expressing the representative prostate-specific polypeptide P502S, as compared to control fibroblasts. The percentage lysis is shown as a series of effector:target ratios, as indicated.

FIGS. 2A and 2B illustrate the ability of T cells to recognize cells expressing the representative prostate-specific polypeptide P502S. In each case, the number of γ-interferon spots is shown for different numbers of responders. In FIG. 2A, data is presented for fibroblasts pulsed with the P2S-12 peptide, as compared to fibroblasts pulsed with a control E75 peptide. In FIG. 2B, data is presented for fibroblasts expressing P502S, as compared to fibroblasts expressing HER-2/neu.

FIG. 3 represents a peptide competition binding assay showing that the P1S#10 peptide, derived from P501S, binds HLA-A2. Peptide P1S#10 inhibits HLA-A2 restricted presentation of fluM58 peptide to CTL clone D150M58 in TNF release bioassay. D150M58 CTL is specific for the HLA-A2 binding influenza matrix peptide fluM58.

FIG. 4 illustrates the ability of T cell lines generated from P1S#10 immunized mice to specifically lyse P1S#10-pulsed Jurkat A2 Kb targets and P501S-transduced Jurkat A2 Kb targets, as compared to EGFP-transduced Jurkat A2 Kb. The percent lysis is shown as a series of effector to target ratios, as indicated.

FIG. 5 illustrates the ability of a T cell clone to recognize and specifically lyse Jurkat A2 Kb cells expressing the representative prostate-specific polypeptide P501S, thereby demonstrating that the P1S#10 peptide may be a naturally processed epitope of the P501S polypeptide.

FIGS. 6A and 6B are graphs illustrating the specificity of a CD8⁺ cell line (3A-1) for a representative prostate-specific antigen (P501S). FIG. 6A shows the results of a ⁵¹Cr release assay. The percent specific lysis is shown as a series of effector:target ratios, as indicated. FIG. 6B shows the production of interferon-gamma by 3A-1 cells stimulated with autologous B-LCL transduced with P501S, at varying effector:target rations as indicated.

FIG. 7 is a Western blot showing the expression of P501S in baculovirus.

FIG. 8 illustrates the results of epitope mapping studies on P501S.

FIG. 9 is a schematic representation of the P501S protein showing the location of transmembrane domains and predicted intracellular and extracellular domains.

FIG. 10 is a genomic map showing the location of the prostate genes P775P, P704P, B305D, P712P and P774P within the Cat Eye Syndrome region of chromosome 22q11.2

FIG. 11 shows the results of an ELISA assay to determine the specificity of rabbit polyclonal antisera raised against P501S.

FIGS. 12A(1), 12A(2), 12A(3), and B are the full-length cDNA (SEQ ID NO:591) and predicted amino acid (SEQ ID NO:592) sequences, respectively, for the clone P788P.

SEQ ID NO: 1 is the determined cDNA sequence for F1-13

SEQ ID NO: 2 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for F1-12

SEQ ID NO: 3 is the determined 5′ cDNA sequence for F1-12

SEQ ID NO: 4 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for F1-16

SEQ ID NO: 5 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for H1-1

SEQ ID NO: 6 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for H1-9

SEQ ID NO: 7 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for H1-4

SEQ ID NO: 8 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for J1-17

SEQ ID NO: 9 is the determined 5′ cDNA sequence for J1-17

SEQ ID NO: 10 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for L1-12

SEQ ID NO: 11 is the determined 5′ cDNA sequence for L1-12

SEQ ID NO: 12 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for N1-1862

SEQ ID NO: 13 is the determined 5′ cDNA sequence for N1-1862

SEQ ID NO: 14 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for J1-1863

SEQ ID NO: 15 is the determined 5′ cDNA sequence for J1-13

SEQ ID NO: 16 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for J1-19

SEQ ID NO: 17 is the determined 5′ cDNA sequence for J1-19

SEQ ID NO: 18 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for J1-25

SEQ ID NO: 19 is the determined 5′ cDNA sequence for J1-25

SEQ ID NO: 20 is the determined 5′ cDNA sequence for J1-24

SEQ ID NO: 21 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for J1-24

SEQ ID NO: 22 is the determined 5′ cDNA sequence for K1-58

SEQ ID NO: 23 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for K1-58

SEQ ID NO: 24 is the determined 5′ cDNA sequence for K1-63

SEQ ID NO: 25 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for K1-63

SEQ ID NO: 26 is the determined 5′ cDNA sequence for L1-4

SEQ ID NO: 27 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for L1-4

SEQ ID NO: 28 is the determined 5′ cDNA sequence for L1-14

SEQ ID NO: 29 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for L1-14

SEQ ID NO: 30 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for J1-12

SEQ ID NO: 31 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for J1-16

SEQ ID NO: 32 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for J1-21

SEQ ID NO: 33 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for K1-48

SEQ ID NO: 34 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for K1-55

SEQ ID NO: 35 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for L1-2

SEQ ID NO: 36 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for L1-6

SEQ ID NO: 37 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for N1-1858

SEQ ID NO: 38 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for N1-1860

SEQ ID NO: 39 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for N1-1861

SEQ ID NO: 40 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for N1-1864

SEQ ID NO: 41 is the determined cDNA sequence for P5

SEQ ID NO: 42 is the determined cDNA sequence for P8

SEQ ID NO: 43 is the determined cDNA sequence for P9

SEQ ID NO: 44 is the determined cDNA sequence for P18

SEQ ID NO: 45 is the determined cDNA sequence for P20

SEQ ID NO: 46 is the determined cDNA sequence for P29

SEQ ID NO: 47 is the determined cDNA sequence for P30

SEQ ID NO: 48 is the determined cDNA sequence for P34

SEQ ID NO: 49 is the determined cDNA sequence for P36

SEQ ID NO: 50 is the determined cDNA sequence for P38

SEQ ID NO: 51 is the determined cDNA sequence for P39

SEQ ID NO: 52 is the determined cDNA sequence for P42

SEQ ID NO: 53 is the determined cDNA sequence for P47

SEQ ID NO: 54 is the determined cDNA sequence for P49

SEQ ID NO: 55 is the determined cDNA sequence for P50

SEQ ID NO: 56 is the determined cDNA sequence for P53

SEQ ID NO: 57 is the determined cDNA sequence for P55

SEQ ID NO: 58 is the determined cDNA sequence for P60

SEQ ID NO: 59 is the determined cDNA sequence for P64

SEQ ID NO: 60 is the determined cDNA sequence for P65

SEQ ID NO: 61 is the determined cDNA sequence for P73

SEQ ID NO: 62 is the determined cDNA sequence for P75

SEQ ID NO: 63 is the determined cDNA sequence for P76

SEQ ID NO: 64 is the determined cDNA sequence for P79

SEQ ID NO: 65 is the determined cDNA sequence for P84

SEQ ID NO: 66 is the determined cDNA sequence for P68

SEQ ID NO: 67 is the determined cDNA sequence for P80 (also referred to as P704P)

SEQ ID NO: 68 is the determined cDNA sequence for P82

SEQ ID NO: 69 is the determined cDNA sequence for U1-3064

SEQ ID NO: 70 is the determined cDNA sequence for U1-3065

SEQ ID NO: 71 is the determined cDNA sequence for V1-3692

SEQ ID NO: 72 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1A-3905

SEQ ID NO: 73 is the determined cDNA sequence for V1-3686

SEQ ID NO: 74 is the determined cDNA sequence for R1-2330

SEQ ID NO: 75 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1B-3976

SEQ ID NO: 76 is the determined cDNA sequence for V1-3679

SEQ ID NO: 77 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1G-4736

SEQ ID NO: 78 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1G-4738

SEQ ID NO: 79 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1G-4741

SEQ ID NO: 80 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1G-4744

SEQ ID NO: 81 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1G-4734

SEQ ID NO: 82 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1H-4774

SEQ ID NO: 83 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1H-4781

SEQ ID NO: 84 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1H-4785

SEQ ID NO: 85 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1H-4787

SEQ ID NO: 86 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1H-4796

SEQ ID NO: 87 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1I-4807

SEQ ID NO: 88 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1I-4810

SEQ ID NO: 89 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1I-4811

SEQ ID NO: 90 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1J-4876

SEQ ID NO: 91 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1K-4884

SEQ ID NO: 92 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1K-4896

SEQ ID NO: 93 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1G-4761

SEQ ID NO: 94 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1G-4762

SEQ ID NO: 95 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1H-4766

SEQ ID NO: 96 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1H-4770

SEQ ID NO: 97 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1H-4771

SEQ ID NO: 98 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1H-4772

SEQ ID NO: 99 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1D-4297

SEQ ID NO: 100 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1D-4309

SEQ ID NO: 101 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1D.1-4278

SEQ ID NO: 102 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1D-4288

SEQ ID NO: 103 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1D-4283

SEQ ID NO: 104 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1D-4304

SEQ ID NO: 105 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1D-4296

SEQ ID NO: 106 is the determined cDNA sequence for 1D-4280

SEQ ID NO: 107 is the determined full length cDNA sequence for F1-12 (also referred to as P504S)

SEQ ID NO: 108 is the predicted amino acid sequence for F1-12

SEQ ID NO: 109 is the determined full length cDNA sequence for J1-17

SEQ ID NO: 110 is the determined full length cDNA sequence for L1-12 (also referred to as P501S)

SEQ ID NO: 107 is the determined full length cDNA sequence for N1-1862 (also referred to as P503S)

SEQ ID NO:112 is the predicted amino acid sequence for J1-17

SEQ ID NO: 113 is the predicted amino acid sequence for L1-12 (also referred to as P501S)

SEQ ID NO: 114 is the predicted amino acid sequence for N1-1862 (also referred to as P503S)

SEQ ID NO: 115 is the determined cDNA sequence for P89

SEQ ID NO: 116 is the determined cDNA sequence for P90

SEQ ID NO: 117 is the determined cDNA sequence for P92

SEQ ID NO: 118 is the determined cDNA sequence for P95

SEQ ID NO: 119 is the determined cDNA sequence for P98

SEQ ID NO: 120 is the determined cDNA sequence for P102

SEQ ID NO: 121 is the determined cDNA sequence for P110

SEQ ID NO: 122 is the determined cDNA sequence for P111

SEQ ID NO: 123 is the determined cDNA sequence for P114

SEQ ID NO: 124 is the determined cDNA sequence for P115

SEQ ID NO: 125 is the determined cDNA sequence for P116

SEQ ID NO: 126 is the determined cDNA sequence for P124

SEQ ID NO: 127 is the determined cDNA sequence for P126

SEQ ID NO: 128 is the determined cDNA sequence for P130

SEQ ID NO: 129 is the determined cDNA sequence for P133

SEQ ID NO: 130 is the determined cDNA sequence for P138

SEQ ID NO: 131 is the determined cDNA sequence for P143

SEQ ID NO: 132 is the determined cDNA sequence for P151

SEQ ID NO: 133 is the determined cDNA sequence for P156

SEQ ID NO: 134 is the determined cDNA sequence for P157

SEQ ID NO: 135 is the determined cDNA sequence for P166

SEQ ID NO: 136 is the determined cDNA sequence for P176

SEQ ID NO: 137 is the determined cDNA sequence for P178

SEQ ID NO: 138 is the determined cDNA sequence for P179

SEQ ID NO: 139 is the determined cDNA sequence for P185

SEQ ID NO: 140 is the determined cDNA sequence for P192

SEQ ID NO: 141 is the determined cDNA sequence for P201

SEQ ID NO: 142 is the determined cDNA sequence for P204

SEQ ID NO: 143 is the determined cDNA sequence for P208

SEQ ID NO: 144 is the determined cDNA sequence for P211

SEQ ID NO: 145 is the determined cDNA sequence for P213

SEQ ID NO: 146 is the determined cDNA sequence for P219

SEQ ID NO: 147 is the determined cDNA sequence for P237

SEQ ID NO: 148 is the determined cDNA sequence for P239

SEQ ID NO: 149 is the determined cDNA sequence for P248

SEQ ID NO: 150 is the determined cDNA sequence for P251

SEQ ID NO: 151 is the determined cDNA sequence for P255

SEQ ID NO: 152 is the determined cDNA sequence for P256

SEQ ID NO: 153 is the determined cDNA sequence for P259

SEQ ID NO: 154 is the determined cDNA sequence for P260

SEQ ID NO: 155 is the determined cDNA sequence for P263

SEQ ID NO: 156 is the determined cDNA sequence for P264

SEQ ID NO: 157 is the determined cDNA sequence for P266

SEQ ID NO: 159 is the determined cDNA sequence for P270

SEQ ID NO: 159 is the determined cDNA sequence for P272

SEQ ID NO: 160 is the determined cDNA sequence for P278

SEQ ID NO: 161 is the determined cDNA sequence for P105

SEQ ID NO: 162 is the determined cDNA sequence for P107

SEQ ID NO: 163 is the determined cDNA sequence for P137

SEQ ID NO: 164 is the determined cDNA sequence for P194

SEQ ID NO: 165 is the determined cDNA sequence for P195

SEQ ID NO: 166 is the determined cDNA sequence for P196

SEQ ID NO: 167 is the determined cDNA sequence for P220

SEQ ID NO: 168 is the determined cDNA sequence for P234

SEQ ID NO: 169 is the determined cDNA sequence for P235

SEQ ID NO: 170 is the determined cDNA sequence for P243

SEQ ID NO: 171 is the determined cDNA sequence for P703P-DE1

SEQ ID NO: 172 is the determined cDNA sequence for P703P-DE1

SEQ ID NO: 173 is the determined cDNA sequence for P703P-DE2

SEQ ID NO: 174 is the determined cDNA sequence for P703P-DE6

SEQ ID NO: 175 is the determined cDNA sequence for P703P-DE13

SEQ ID NO: 176 is the predicted amino acid sequence for P703P-DE13

SEQ ID NO: 177 is the determined cDNA sequence for P703P-DE14

SEQ ID NO: 178 is the predicted amino acid sequence for P703P-DE14

SEQ ID NO: 179 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1G-4736

SEQ ID NO: 180 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1G-4738

SEQ ID NO: 181 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1G-4741

SEQ ID NO: 182 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1G-4744

SEQ ID NO: 183 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1H-4774

SEQ ID NO: 184 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1H-4781

SEQ ID NO: 185 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1H-4785

SEQ ID NO: 186 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1H-4787

SEQ ID NO: 187 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1H-4796

SEQ ID NO: 188 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1I-4807

SEQ ID NO: 189 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for 1I-4810

SEQ ID NO: 190 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for 1I-4811

SEQ ID NO: 191 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1J-4876

SEQ ID NO: 192 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1K-4884

SEQ ID NO: 193 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1K-4896

SEQ ID NO: 194 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1G-4761

SEQ ID NO: 195 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1G-4762

SEQ ID NO: 196 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1H-4766

SEQ ID NO: 197 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for 1H-4770

SEQ ID NO: 198 is the determined 3′ cDNA sequence for 1H-4771

SEQ ID NO: 199 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1H-4772

SEQ ID NO: 200 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1D-4309

SEQ ID NO: 201 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1D.1-4278

SEQ ID NO: 202 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1D-4288

SEQ ID NO: 203 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1D-4283

SEQ ID NO: 204 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1D-4304

SEQ ID NO: 205 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1D-4296

SEQ ID NO: 206 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for 1D-4280

SEQ ID NO: 207 is the determined cDNA sequence for 10-d8fwd

SEQ ID NO: 208 is the determined cDNA sequence for 10-H10con

SEQ ID NO: 209 is the determined cDNA sequence for 11-C8rev

SEQ ID NO: 210 is the determined cDNA sequence for 7.g6fwd

SEQ ID NO: 211 is the determined cDNA sequence for 7.g6rev

SEQ ID NO: 212 is the determined cDNA sequence for 8-b5fwd

SEQ ID NO: 213 is the determined cDNA sequence for 8-b5rev

SEQ ID NO: 214 is the determined cDNA sequence for 8-b6fwd

SEQ ID NO: 215 is the determined cDNA sequence for 8-b6 rev

SEQ ID NO: 216 is the determined cDNA sequence for 8-d4fwd

SEQ ID NO: 217 is the determined cDNA sequence for 8-d9rev

SEQ ID NO: 218 is the determined cDNA sequence for 8-g3fwd

SEQ ID NO: 219 is the determined cDNA sequence for 8-g3rev

SEQ ID NO: 220 is the determined cDNA sequence for 8-h11rev

SEQ ID NO: 221 is the determined cDNA sequence for g-f12fwd

SEQ ID NO: 222 is the determined cDNA sequence for g-f3rev

SEQ ID NO: 223 is the determined cDNA sequence for P509S

SEQ ID NO: 224 is the determined cDNA sequence for P510S

SEQ ID NO: 225 is the determined cDNA sequence for P703DE5

SEQ ID NO: 226 is the determined cDNA sequence for 9-A11

SEQ ID NO: 227 is the determined cDNA sequence for 8-C6

SEQ ID NO: 228 is the determined cDNA sequence for 8-H7

SEQ ID NO: 229 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN13

SEQ ID NO: 230 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN14

SEQ ID NO: 231 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN23

SEQ ID NO: 232 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN24

SEQ ID NO: 233 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN25

SEQ ID NO: 234 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN30

SEQ ID NO: 235 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN34

SEQ ID NO: 236 is the determined cDNA sequence for PTPN35

SEQ ID NO: 237 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN36

SEQ ID NO: 238 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN38

SEQ ID NO: 239 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN39

SEQ ID NO: 240 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN40

SEQ ID NO: 241 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN41

SEQ ID NO: 242 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN42

SEQ ID NO: 243 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN45

SEQ ID NO: 244 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN46

SEQ ID NO: 245 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN51

SEQ ID NO: 246 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN56

SEQ ID NO: 247 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN64

SEQ ID NO: 248 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN65

SEQ ID NO: 249 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN67

SEQ ID NO: 250 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN76

SEQ ID NO: 251 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN84

SEQ ID NO: 252 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN85

SEQ ID NO: 253 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN86

SEQ ID NO: 254 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN87

SEQ ID NO: 255 is the determined cDNA sequence for JPTPN88

SEQ ID NO: 256 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1F1

SEQ ID NO: 257 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1F2

SEQ ID NO: 258 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1C8

SEQ ID NO: 259 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1B1

SEQ ID NO: 260 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1B2

SEQ ID NO: 261 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1D3

SEQ ID NO: 262 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1A4

SEQ ID NO: 263 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1F5

SEQ ID NO: 264 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1E6

SEQ ID NO: 265 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1D6

SEQ ID NO: 266 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1B5

SEQ ID NO: 267 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1A6

SEQ ID NO: 268 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1E8

SEQ ID NO: 269 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1D7

SEQ ID NO: 270 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1D9

SEQ ID NO: 271 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1C10

SEQ ID NO: 272 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1A9

SEQ ID NO: 273 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1F12

SEQ ID NO: 274 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1E12

SEQ ID NO: 275 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1D11

SEQ ID NO: 276 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1C11

SEQ ID NO: 277 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP11C12

SEQ ID NO: 278 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1B12

SEQ ID NO: 279 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP1A12

SEQ ID NO: 280 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8G2

SEQ ID NO: 281 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8H1

SEQ ID NO: 282 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8H2

SEQ ID NO: 283 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8A3

SEQ ID NO: 284 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8A4

SEQ ID NO: 285 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8C3

SEQ ID NO: 286 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8G4

SEQ ID NO: 287 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8B6

SEQ ID NO: 288 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8D6

SEQ ID NO: 289 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8F5

SEQ ID NO: 290 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8A8

SEQ ID NO: 291 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8C7

SEQ ID NO: 292 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8D7

SEQ ID NO: 293 is the determined cDNA sequence for P8D8

SEQ ID NO: 294 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8E7

SEQ ID NO: 295 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8F8

SEQ ID NO: 296 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8G8

SEQ ID NO: 297 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8B10

SEQ ID NO: 298 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8C10

SEQ ID NO: 299 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8E9

SEQ ID NO: 300 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8E10

SEQ ID NO: 301 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8F9

SEQ ID NO: 302 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8H9

SEQ ID NO: 303 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8C12

SEQ ID NO: 304 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8E11

SEQ ID NO: 305 is the determined cDNA sequence for JP8E12

SEQ ID NO: 306 is the amino acid sequence for the peptide PS2#12

SEQ ID NO: 307 is the determined cDNA sequence for P711P

SEQ ID NO: 308 is the determined cDNA sequence for P712P

SEQ ID NO: 309 is the determined cDNA sequence for CLONE23

SEQ ID NO: 310 is the determined cDNA sequence for P774P

SEQ ID NO: 311 is the determined cDNA sequence for P775P

SEQ ID NO: 312 is the determined cDNA sequence for P715P

SEQ ID NO: 313 is the determined cDNA sequence for P710P

SEQ ID NO: 314 is the determined cDNA sequence for P767P

SEQ ID NO: 315 is the determined cDNA sequence for P768P

SEQ ID NO: 316-325 are the determined cDNA sequences of previously isolated genes

SEQ ID NO: 326 is the determined cDNA sequence for P703PDE5

SEQ ID NO: 327 is the predicted amino acid sequence for P703PDE5

SEQ ID NO: 328 is the determined cDNA sequence for P703P6.26

SEQ ID NO: 329 is the predicted amino acid sequence for P703P6.26

SEQ ID NO: 330 is the determined cDNA sequence for P703PX-23

SEQ ID NO: 331 is the predicted amino acid sequence for P703PX-23

SEQ ID NO: 332 is the determined full length cDNA sequence for P509S

SEQ ID NO: 333 is the determined extended cDNA sequence for P707P (also referred to as 11-C9)

SEQ ID NO: 334 is the determined cDNA sequence for P714P

SEQ ID NO: 335 is the determined cDNA sequence for P705P (also referred to as 9-F3)

SEQ ID NO: 336 is the predicted amino acid sequence for P705P

SEQ ID NO: 337 is the amino acid sequence of the peptide P1S#10

SEQ ID NO: 338 is the amino acid sequence of the peptide p5

SEQ ID NO: 339 is the predicted amino acid sequence of P509S

SEQ ID NO: 340 is the determined cDNA sequence for P778P

SEQ ID NO: 341 is the determined cDNA sequence for P786P

SEQ ID NO: 342 is the determined cDNA sequence for P789P

SEQ ID NO: 343 is the determined cDNA sequence for a clone showing homology to Homo sapiens MM46 mRNA

SEQ ID NO: 344 is the determined cDNA sequence for a clone showing homology to Homo sapiens TNF-alpha stimulated ABC protein (ABC50) mRNA

SEQ ID NO: 345 is the determined cDNA sequence for a clone showing homology to Homo sapiens mRNA for E-cadherin

SEQ ID NO: 346 is the determined cDNA sequence for a clone showing homology to Human nuclear-encoded mitochondrial serine hydroxymethyltransferase (SHMT)

SEQ ID NO: 347 is the determined cDNA sequence for a clone showing homology to Homo sapiens natural resistance-associated macrophage protein2 (NRAMP2)

SEQ ID NO: 348 is the determined cDNA sequence for a clone showing homology to Homo sapiens phosphoglucomutase-related protein (PGMRP)

SEQ ID NO: 349 is the determined cDNA sequence for a clone showing homology to Human mRNA for proteosome subunit p40 SEQ ID NO: 350 is the determined cDNA sequence for P777P

SEQ ID NO: 351 is the determined cDNA sequence for P779P

SEQ ID NO: 352 is the determined cDNA sequence for P790P

SEQ ID NO: 353 is the determined cDNA sequence for P784P

SEQ ID NO: 354 is the determined cDNA sequence for P776P

SEQ ID NO: 355 is the determined cDNA sequence for P780P

SEQ ID NO: 356 is the determined cDNA sequence for P544S

SEQ ID NO: 357 is the determined cDNA sequence for P745S

SEQ ID NO: 358 is the determined cDNA sequence for P782P

SEQ ID NO: 359 is the determined cDNA sequence for P783P

SEQ ID NO: 360 is the determined cDNA sequence for unknown 17984

SEQ ID NO: 361 is the determined cDNA sequence for P 787P

SEQ ID NO: 362 is the determined cDNA sequence for P788P

SEQ ID NO: 363 is the determined cDNA sequence for unknown 17994

SEQ ID NO: 364 is the determined cDNA sequence for P781P

SEQ ID NO: 365 is the determined cDNA sequence for P785P

SEQ ID NO: 366-375 are the determined cDNA sequences for splice variants of B305D.

SEQ ID NO: 376 is the predicted amino acid sequence encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 366.

SEQ ID NO: 377 is the predicted amino acid sequence encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 372.

SEQ ID NO: 378 is the predicted amino acid sequence encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 373.

SEQ ID NO: 379 is the predicted amino acid sequence encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 374.

SEQ ID NO: 380 is the predicted amino acid sequence encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 375.

SEQ ID NO: 381 is the determined cDNA sequence for B716P.

SEQ ID NO: 382 is the determined full-length cDNA sequence for P711P.

SEQ ID NO: 383 is the predicted amino acid sequence for P711P.

SEQ ID NO: 384 is the cDNA sequence for P1000C.

SEQ ID NO: 385 is the cDNA sequence for CGI-82.

SEQ ID NO:386 is the cDNA sequence for 23320.

SEQ ID NO:387 is the cDNA sequence for CGI-69.

SEQ ID NO:388 is the cDNA sequence for L-iditol-2-dehydrogenase.

SEQ ID NO:389 is the cDNA sequence for 23379.

SEQ ID NO:390 is the cDNA sequence for 23381.

SEQ ID NO:391 is the cDNA sequence for KIAA0122.

SEQ ID NO:392 is the cDNA sequence for 23399.

SEQ ID NO:393 is the cDNA sequence for a previously identified gene.

SEQ ID NO:394 is the cDNA sequence for HCLBP.

SEQ ID NO:395 is the cDNA sequence for transglutaminase.

SEQ ID NO:396 is the cDNA sequence for a previously identified gene.

SEQ ID NO:397 is the cDNA sequence for PAP.

SEQ ID NO:398 is the cDNA sequence for Ets transcription factor PDEF.

SEQ ID NO:399 is the cDNA sequence for hTGR.

SEQ ID NO:400 is the cDNA sequence for KIAA0295.

SEQ ID NO:401 is the cDNA sequence for 22545.

SEQ ID NO:402 is the cDNA sequence for 22547.

SEQ ID NO:403 is the cDNA sequence for 22548.

SEQ ID NO:404 is the cDNA sequence for 22550.

SEQ ID NO:405 is the cDNA sequence for 22551.

SEQ ID NO:406 is the cDNA sequence for 22552.

SEQ ID NO:407 is the cDNA sequence for 22553 (also known as P1020C).

SEQ ID NO:408 is the cDNA sequence for 22558.

SEQ ID NO:409 is the cDNA sequence for 22562.

SEQ ID NO:410 is the cDNA sequence for 22565.

SEQ ID NO:411 is the cDNA sequence for 22567.

SEQ ID NO:412 is the cDNA sequence for 22568.

SEQ ID NO:413 is the cDNA sequence for 22570.

SEQ ID NO:414 is the cDNA sequence for 22571.

SEQ ID NO:415 is the cDNA sequence for 22572.

SEQ ID NO:416 is the cDNA sequence for 22573.

SEQ ID NO:417 is the cDNA sequence for 22573.

SEQ ID NO:418 is the cDNA sequence for 22575.

SEQ ID NO:419 is the cDNA sequence for 22580.

SEQ ID NO:420 is the cDNA sequence for 22581.

SEQ ID NO:421 is the cDNA sequence for 22582.

SEQ ID NO:422 is the cDNA sequence for 22583.

SEQ ID NO:423 is the cDNA sequence for 22584.

SEQ ID NO:424 is the cDNA sequence for 22585.

SEQ ID NO:425 is the cDNA sequence for 22586.

SEQ ID NO:426 is the cDNA sequence for 22587.

SEQ ID NO:427 is the cDNA sequence for 22588.

SEQ ID NO:428 is the cDNA sequence for 22589.

SEQ ID NO:429 is the cDNA sequence for 22590.

SEQ ID NO:430 is the cDNA sequence for 22591.

SEQ ID NO:431 is the cDNA sequence for 22592.

SEQ ID NO:432 is the cDNA sequence for 22593.

SEQ ID NO:433 is the cDNA sequence for 22594.

SEQ ID NO:434 is the cDNA sequence for 22595.

SEQ ID NO:435 is the cDNA sequence for 22596.

SEQ ID NO:436 is the cDNA sequence for 22847.

SEQ ID NO:437 is the cDNA sequence for 22848.

SEQ ID NO:438 is the cDNA sequence for 22849.

SEQ ID NO:439 is the cDNA sequence for 22851.

SEQ ID NO:440 is the cDNA sequence for 22852.

SEQ ID NO:441 is the cDNA sequence for 22853.

SEQ ID NO:442 is the cDNA sequence for 22854.

SEQ ID NO:443 is the cDNA sequence for 22855.

SEQ ID NO:444 is the cDNA sequence for 22856.

SEQ ID NO:445 is the cDNA sequence for 22857.

SEQ ID NO:446 is the cDNA sequence for 23601.

SEQ ID NO:447 is the cDNA sequence for 23602.

SEQ ID NO:448 is the cDNA sequence for 23605.

SEQ ID NO:449 is the cDNA sequence for 23606.

SEQ ID NO:450 is the cDNA sequence for 23612.

SEQ ID NO:451 is the cDNA sequence for 23614.

SEQ ID NO:452 is the cDNA sequence for 23618.

SEQ ID NO:453 is the cDNA sequence for 23622.

SEQ ID NO:454 is the cDNA sequence for folate hydrolase.

SEQ ID NO:455 is the cDNA sequence for LIM protein.

SEQ ID NO:456 is the cDNA sequence for a known gene.

SEQ ID NO:457 is the cDNA sequence for a known gene.

SEQ ID NO:458 is the cDNA sequence for a previously identified gene.

SEQ ID NO:459 is the cDNA sequence for 23045.

SEQ ID NO:460 is the cDNA sequence for 23032.

SEQ ID NO:461 is the cDNA sequence for 23054.

SEQ ID NO:462-467 are cDNA sequences for known genes.

SEQ ID NO:468-471 are cDNA sequences for P710P.

SEQ ID NO:472 is a cDNA sequence for P1001C.

SEQ ID NO: 473 is the determined cDNA sequence for a first splice variant of P775P (referred to as 27505).

SEQ ID NO: 474 is the determined cDNA sequence for a second splice variant of P775P (referred to as 19947).

SEQ ID NO: 475 is the determined cDNA sequence for a third splice variant of P775P (referred to as 19941).

SEQ ID NO: 476 is the determined cDNA sequence for a fourth splice variant of P775P (referred to as 19937).

SEQ ID NO: 477 is a first predicted amino acid sequence encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 474.

SEQ ID NO: 478 is a second predicted amino acid sequence encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 474.

SEQ ID NO: 479 is the predicted amino acid sequence encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 475.

SEQ ID NO: 480 is a first predicted amino acid sequence encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 473.

SEQ ID NO: 481 is a second predicted amino acid sequence encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 473.

SEQ ID NO: 482 is a third predicted amino acid sequence encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 473.

SEQ ID NO: 483 is a fourth predicted amino acid sequence encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 473.

SEQ ID NO: 484 is the first 30 amino acids of the M. tuberculosis antigen Ra12.

SEQ ID NO: 485 is the PCR primer AW025.

SEQ ID NO: 486 is the PCR primer AW003.

SEQ ID NO: 487 is the PCR primer AW027.

SEQ ID NO: 488 is the PCR primer AW026.

SEQ ID NO: 489-501 are peptides employed in epitope mapping studies.

SEQ ID NO: 502 is the determined cDNA sequence of the complementarity determining region for the anti-P503S monoclonal antibody 20D4.

SEQ ID NO: 503 is the determined cDNA sequence of the complementarity determining region for the anti-P503S monoclonal antibody JA1.

SEQ ID NO: 504 & 505 are peptides employed in epitope mapping studies.

SEQ ID NO: 506 is the determined cDNA sequence of the complementarity determining region for the anti-P703P monoclonal antibody 8H2.

SEQ ID NO: 507 is the determined cDNA sequence of the complementarity determining region for the anti-P703P monoclonal antibody 7H8.

SEQ ID NO: 508 is the determined cDNA sequence of the complementarity determining region for the anti-P703P monoclonal antibody 2D4.

SEQ ID NO: 509-522 are peptides employed in epitope mapping studies.

SEQ ID NO: 523 is a mature form of P703P used to raise antibodies against P703P.

SEQ ID NO: 524 is the putative full-length cDNA sequence of P703P.

SEQ ID NO: 525 is the predicted amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID NO: 524.

SEQ ID NO: 526 is the full-length cDNA sequence for P790P.

SEQ ID NO: 527 is the predicted amino acid sequence for P790P.

SEQ ID NO: 528 & 529 are PCR primers.

SEQ ID NO: 530 is the cDNA sequence of a splice variant of SEQ ID NO: 366.

SEQ ID NO: 531 is the cDNA sequence of the open reading frame of SEQ ID NO: 530.

SEQ ID NO: 532 is the predicted amino acid encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 531.

SEQ ID NO: 533 is the DNA sequence of a putative ORF of P775P.

SEQ ID NO: 534 is the predicted amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID NO: 533.

SEQ ID NO: 535 is a first full-length cDNA sequence for P510S.

SEQ ID NO: 536 is a second full-length cDNA sequence for P510S.

SEQ ID NO: 537 is the predicted amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID NO: 535.

SEQ ID NO: 538 is the predicted amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID NO: 536.

SEQ ID NO: 539 is the peptide P501S-370.

SEQ ID NO: 540 is the peptide P501S-376.

SEQ ID NO: 541-551 are epitopes of P501S.

SEQ ID NO: 552 is an extended cDNA sequence for P712P.

SEQ ID NO: 553-568 are the amino acid sequences encoded by predicted open reading frames within SEQ ID NO: 552.

SEQ ID NO: 569 is an extended cDNA sequence for P776P.

SEQ ID NO: 570 is the determined cDNA sequence for a splice variant of P776P referred to as contig 6.

SEQ ID NO: 571 is the determined cDNA sequence for a splice variant of P776P referred to as contig 7.

SEQ ID NO: 572 is the determined cDNA sequence for a splice variant of P776P referred to as contig 14.

SEQ ID NO: 573 is the amino acid sequence encoded by a first predicted ORF of SEQ ID NO: 570.

SEQ ID NO: 574 is the amino acid sequence encoded by a second predicted ORF of SEQ ID NO: 570.

SEQ ID NO: 575 is the amino acid sequence encoded by a predicted ORF of SEQ ID NO: 571.

SEQ ID NO: 576-586 are amino acid sequences encoded by predicted ORFs of SEQ ID NO: 569.

SEQ ID NO: 587 is a DNA consensus sequence of the sequences of P767P and P777P.

SEQ ID NO: 588-590 are amino acid sequences encoded by predicted ORFs of SEQ ID NO: 587.

SEQ ID NO: 591 is an extended cDNA sequence for P1020C.

SEQ ID NO: 592 is the predicted amino acid sequence encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: P1020C.

SEQ ID NO: 593 is a splice variant of P775P referred to as 50748.

SEQ ID NO: 594 is a splice variant of P775P referred to as 50717.SEQ ID NO: 595 is a splice variant of P775P referred to as 45985.

SEQ ID NO: 596 is a splice variant of P775P referred to as 38769.

SEQ ID NO: 597 is a splice variant of P775P referred to as 37922.

SEQ ID NO: 598 is a splice variant of P510S referred to as 49274.

SEQ ID NO: 599 is a splice variant of P510S referred to as 39487.

SEQ ID NO: 600 is a splice variant of P504S referred to as 5167.16.

SEQ ID NO: 601 is a splice variant of P504S referred to as 5167.1.

SEQ ID NO: 602 is a splice variant of P504S referred to as 5163.46.

SEQ ID NO: 603 is a splice variant of P504S referred to as 5163.42.

SEQ ID NO: 604 is a splice variant of P504S referred to as 5163.34.

SEQ ID NO: 605 is a splice variant of P504S referred to as 5163.17.

SEQ ID NO: 606 is a splice variant of P501S referred to as 10640.

SEQ ID NO: 607-615 are the sequences of PCR primers.

SEQ ID NO: 616 is the determined cDNA sequence of a fusion of P703P and PSA.

SEQ ID NO: 617 is the amino acid sequence of the fusion of P703 P and PSA.

SEQ ID NO: 618-689 are determined cDNA sequences of prostate-specific clones.

SEQ ID NO: 690 is the cDNA sequence of the gene DD3.

SEQ ID NO: 691-697 are determined cDNA sequences of prostate-specific clones.

SEQ ID NO: 698 is an extended cDNA sequence for P714P.

SEQ ID NO: 699-701 are the cDNA sequences for splice variants of P704P.

SEQ ID NO: 702 is the cDNA sequence of a spliced variant of P553S referred to as P553S-14.

SEQ ID NO: 703 is the cDNA sequence of a spliced variant of P553S referred to as P553S-12.

SEQ ID NO: 704 is the cDNA sequence of a spliced variant of P553S referred to as P553S-10.

SEQ ID NO: 705 is the cDNA sequence of a spliced variant of P553S referred to as P553S-6.

SEQ ID NO: 706 is the amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID NO: 705.

SEQ ID NO: 707 is the amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID NO: 702 SEQ ID NO: 708 is a second amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID NO: 702.

SEQ ID NO: 709-772 are determined cDNA sequences of prostate-specific clones.

SEQ ID NO: 773 is a first full-length cDNA sequence for prostate-specific transglutaminase gene (also referred to herein as P558S).

SEQ ID NO: 774 is a second full-length cDNA sequence for prostate-specific transglutaminase gene.

SEQ ID NO: 775 is the amino acid sequence encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 773.

SEQ ID NO: 776 is the amino acid sequence encoded by the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 774.

SEQ ID NO: 777 is the full-length cDNA sequence for P788P.

SEQ ID NO: 778 is the amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID NO: 777.

SEQ ID NO: 779 is the determined cDNA sequence for a polymorphic variant of P788P.

SEQ ID NO: 780 is the amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID NO: 779.

SEQ ID NO: 781 is the amino acid sequence of peptide 4 from P703P.

SEQ ID NO: 782 is the cDNA sequence that encodes peptide 4 from P703P.

SEQ ID NO: 783-798 are the cDNA sequence encoding epitopes of P703P.

SEQ ID NO: 799-814 are the amino acid sequences of epitopes of P703P.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

As noted above, the present invention is generally directed to compositions and methods for using the compositions, for example in the therapy and diagnosis of cancer, such as prostate cancer. Certain illustrative compositions described herein include prostate-specific polypeptides, polynucleotides encoding such polypeptides, binding agents such as antibodies, antigen presenting cells (APCs) and/or immune system cells (e.g., T cells). A “prostate-specific protein,” as the term is used herein, refers generally to a protein that is expressed in prostate cells at a level that is at least two fold, and preferably at least five fold, greater than the level of expression in other normal tissues, as determined using a representative assay provided herein. Certain prostate-specific proteins are tumor proteins that react detectably (within an immunoassay, such as an ELISA or Western blot) with antisera of a patient afflicted with prostate cancer.

Therefore, in accordance with the above, and as described further below, the present invention provides illustrative polynucleotide compositions having sequences set forth in SEQ ID NO: 1-111, 115-171, 173-175, 177, 179-305, 307-315, 326, 328, 330, 332-335, 340-375, 381, 382 and 384-476, 524, 526, 530, 531, 533, 535, 536, 552, 569-572, 587, 591, 593-606, 618-705, 709-774, 777 and 789, illustrative polypeptide compositions having amino acid sequences set forth in SEQ ID NO: 112-114, 172, 176, 178, 327, 329, 331, 336, 339, 376-380, 383, 477-483, 496, 504, 505, 519, 520, 522, 525, 527, 532, 534, 537-551, 553-568, 573-586, 588-590, 592, 706-708, 775, 776, 778 and 780, antibody compositions capable of binding such polypeptides, and numerous additional embodiments employing such compositions, for example in the detection, diagnosis and/or therapy of human prostate cancer.

Polynucleotide Compositions

As used herein, the terms “DNA segment” and “polynucleotide” refer to a DNA molecule that has been isolated free of total genomic DNA of a particular species. Therefore, a DNA segment encoding a polypeptide refers to a DNA segment that contains one or more coding sequences yet is substantially isolated away from, or purified free from, total genomic DNA of the species from which the DNA segment is obtained. Included within the terms “DNA segment” and “polynucleotide” are DNA segments and smaller fragments of such segments, and also recombinant vectors, including, for example, plasmids, cosmids, phagemids, phage, viruses, and the like.

As will be understood by those skilled in the art, the DNA segments of this invention can include genomic sequences, extra-genomic and plasmid-encoded sequences and smaller engineered gene segments that express, or may be adapted to express, proteins, polypeptides, peptides and the like. Such segments may be naturally isolated, or modified synthetically by the hand of man.

“Isolated,” as used herein, means that a polynucleotide is substantially away from other coding sequences, and that the DNA segment does not contain large portions of unrelated coding DNA, such as large chromosomal fragments or other functional genes or polypeptide coding regions. Of course, this refers to the DNA segment as originally isolated, and does not exclude genes or coding regions later added to the segment by the hand of man.

As will be recognized by the skilled artisan, polynucleotides may be single-stranded (coding or antisense) or double-stranded, and may be DNA (genomic, cDNA or synthetic) or RNA molecules. RNA molecules include HnRNA molecules, which contain introns and correspond to a DNA molecule in a one-to-one manner, and mRNA molecules, which do not contain introns. Additional coding or non-coding sequences may, but need not, be present within a polynucleotide of the present invention, and a polynucleotide may, but need not, be linked to other molecules and/or support materials.

Polynucleotides may comprise a native sequence (i.e., an endogenous sequence that encodes a prostate-specific protein or a portion thereof) or may comprise a variant, or a biological or antigenic functional equivalent of such a sequence. Polynucleotide variants may contain one or more substitutions, additions, deletions and/or insertions, as further described below, preferably such that the immunogenicity of the encoded polypeptide is not diminished, relative to a native tumor protein. The effect on the immunogenicity of the encoded polypeptide may generally be assessed as described herein. The term “variants” also encompasses homologous genes of xenogenic origin.

When comparing polynucleotide or polypeptide sequences, two sequences are said to be “identical” if the sequence of nucleotides or amino acids in the two sequences is the same when aligned for maximum correspondence, as described below. Comparisons between two sequences are typically performed by comparing the sequences over a comparison window to identify and compare local regions of sequence similarity. A “comparison window” as used herein, refers to a segment of at least about 20 contiguous positions, usually 30 to about 75, 40 to about 50, in which a sequence may be compared to a reference sequence of the same number of contiguous positions after the two sequences are optimally aligned.

Optimal alignment of sequences for comparison may be conducted using the Megalign program in the Lasergene suite of bioinformatics software (DNASTAR, Inc., Madison, Wis.), using default parameters. This program embodies several alignment schemes described in the following references: Dayhoff, M. O. (1978) A model of evolutionary change in proteins—Matrices for detecting distant relationships. In Dayhoff, M. O. (ed.) Atlas of Protein Sequence and Structure, National Biomedical Research Foundation, Washington D.C. Vol. 5, Suppl. 3, pp. 345-358; Hein J. (1990) Unified Approach to Alignment and Phylogenes pp. 626-645 Methods in Enzymology vol. 183, Academic Press, Inc., San Diego, Calif.; Higgins, D. G. and Sharp, P. M. (1989) CABIOS 5:151-153; Myers, E. W. and Muller W. (1988) CABIOS 4:11-17; Robinson, E. D. (1971) Comb. Theor 11:105; Santou, N. Nes, M. (1987) Mol. Biol. Evol. 4:406-425; Sneath, P. H. A. and Sokal, R. R. (1973) Numerical Taxonomy—the Principles and Practice of Numerical Taxonomy, Freeman Press, San Francisco, Calif.; Wilbur, W. J. and Lipman, D. J. (1983) Proc. Natl. Acad., Sci. USA 80:726-730.

Alternatively, optimal alignment of sequences for comparison may be conducted by the local identity algorithm of Smith and Waterman (1981) Add. APL. Math 2:482, by the identity alignment algorithm of Needleman and Wunsch (1970) J. Mol. Biol. 48:443, by the search for similarity methods of Pearson and Lipman (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85: 2444, by computerized implementations of these algorithms (GAP, BESTFIT, BLAST, FASTA, and TFASTA in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package, Genetics Computer Group (GCG), 575 Science Dr., Madison, Wis.), or by inspection.

One preferred example of algorithms that are suitable for determining percent sequence identity and sequence similarity are the BLAST and BLAST 2.0 algorithms, which are described in Altschul et al. (1977) Nucl. Acids Res. 25:3389-3402 and Altschul et al. (1990) J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410, respectively. BLAST and BLAST 2.0 can be used, for example with the parameters described herein, to determine percent sequence identity for the polynucleotides and polypeptides of the invention. Software for performing BLAST analyses is publicly available through the National Center for Biotechnology Information. In one illustrative example, cumulative scores can be calculated using, for nucleotide sequences, the parameters M (reward score for a pair of matching residues; always >0) and N (penalty score for mismatching residues; always <0). For amino acid sequences, a scoring matrix can be used to calculate the cumulative score. Extension of the word hits in each direction are halted when: the cumulative alignment score falls off by the quantity X from its maximum achieved value; the cumulative score goes to zero or below, due to the accumulation of one or more negative-scoring residue alignments; or the end of either sequence is reached. The BLAST algorithm parameters W, T and X determine the sensitivity and speed of the alignment. The BLASTN program (for nucleotide sequences) uses as defaults a wordlength (W) of 11, and expectation (E) of 10, and the BLOSUM62 scoring matrix (see Henikoff and Henikoff (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:10915) alignments, (B) of 50, expectation (E) of 10, M=5, N=−4 and a comparison of both strands.

Preferably, the “percentage of sequence identity” is determined by comparing two optimally aligned sequences over a window of comparison of at least 20 positions, wherein the portion of the polynucleotide or polypeptide sequence in the comparison window may comprise additions or deletions (i.e., gaps) of 20 percent or less, usually 5 to 15 percent, or 10 to 12 percent, as compared to the reference sequences (which does not comprise additions or deletions) for optimal alignment of the two sequences. The percentage is calculated by determining the number of positions at which the identical nucleic acid bases or amino acid residue-occurs in both sequences to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of matched positions by the total number of positions in the reference sequence (i.e., the window size) and multiplying the results by 100 to yield the percentage of sequence identity.

Therefore, the present invention encompasses polynucleotide and polypeptide sequences having substantial identity to the sequences disclosed herein, for example those comprising at least 50% sequence identity, preferably at least 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, or 99% or higher, sequence identity compared to a polynucleotide or polypeptide sequence of this invention using the methods described herein, (e.g., BLAST analysis using standard parameters, as described below). One skilled in this art will recognize that these values can be appropriately adjusted to determine corresponding identity of proteins encoded by two nucleotide sequences by taking into account codon degeneracy, amino acid similarity, reading frame positioning and the like.

In additional embodiments, the present invention provides isolated polynucleotides and polypeptides comprising various lengths of contiguous stretches of sequence identical to or complementary to one or more of the sequences disclosed herein. For example, polynucleotides are provided by this invention that comprise at least about 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500 or 1000 or more contiguous nucleotides of one or more of the sequences disclosed herein as well as all intermediate lengths there between. It will be readily understood that “intermediate lengths”, in this context, means any length between the quoted values, such as 16, 17, 18, 19, etc.; 21, 22, 23, etc.; 30, 31, 32, etc.; 50, 51, 52, 53, etc.; 100, 101, 102, 103, etc.; 150, 151, 152, 153, etc.; including all integers through 200-500; 500-1,000, and the like.

The polynucleotides of the present invention, or fragments thereof, regardless of the length of the coding sequence itself, may be combined with other DNA sequences, such as promoters, polyadenylation signals, additional restriction enzyme sites, multiple cloning sites, other coding segments, and the like, such that their overall length may vary considerably. It is therefore contemplated that a nucleic acid fragment of almost any length may be employed, with the total length preferably being limited by the ease of preparation and use in the intended recombinant DNA protocol. For example, illustrative DNA segments with total lengths of about 10,000, about 5000, about 3000, about 2,000, about 1,000, about 500, about 200, about 100, about 50 base pairs in length, and the like, (including all intermediate lengths) are contemplated to be useful in many implementations of this invention.

In other embodiments, the present invention is directed to polynucleotides that are capable of hybridizing under moderately stringent conditions to a polynucleotide sequence provided herein, or a fragment thereof, or a complementary sequence thereof. Hybridization techniques are well known in the art of molecular biology. For purposes of illustration, suitable moderately stringent conditions for testing the hybridization of a polynucleotide of this invention with other polynucleotides include prewashing in a solution of 5×SSC, 0.5% SDS, 1.0 mM EDTA (pH 8.0); hybridizing at 50° C.-65° C., 5×SSC, overnight; followed by washing twice at 65° C. for 20 minutes with each of 2×, 0.5× and 0.2×SSC containing 0.1% SDS.

Moreover, it will be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art that, as a result of the degeneracy of the genetic code, there are many nucleotide sequences that encode a polypeptide as described herein. Some of these polynucleotides bear minimal homology to the nucleotide sequence of any native gene. Nonetheless, polynucleotides that vary due to differences in codon usage are specifically contemplated by the present invention. Further, alleles of the genes comprising the polynucleotide sequences provided herein are within the scope of the present invention. Alleles are endogenous genes that are altered as a result of one or more mutations, such as deletions, additions and/or substitutions of nucleotides. The resulting mRNA and protein may, but need not, have an altered structure or function. Alleles may be identified using standard techniques (such as hybridization, amplification and/or database sequence comparison).

Probes and Primers

In other embodiments of the present invention, the polynucleotide sequences provided herein can be advantageously used as probes or primers for nucleic acid hybridization. As such, it is contemplated that nucleic acid segments that comprise a sequence region of at least about 15 nucleotide long contiguous sequence that has the same sequence as, or is complementary to, a 15 nucleotide long contiguous sequence disclosed herein will find particular utility. Longer contiguous identical or complementary sequences, e.g., those of about 20, 30, 40, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000 (including all intermediate lengths) and even up to full length sequences will also be of use in certain embodiments.

The ability of such nucleic acid probes to specifically hybridize to a sequence of interest will enable them to be of use in detecting the presence of complementary sequences in a given sample. However, other uses are also envisioned, such as the use of the sequence information for the preparation of mutant species primers, or primers for use in preparing other genetic constructions.

Polynucleotide molecules having sequence regions consisting of contiguous nucleotide stretches of 10-14, 15-20, 30, 50, or even of 100-200 nucleotides or so (including intermediate lengths as well), identical or complementary to a polynucleotide sequence disclosed herein, are particularly contemplated as hybridization probes for use in, e.g., Southern and Northern blotting. This would allow a gene product, or fragment thereof, to be analyzed, both in diverse cell types and also in various bacterial cells. The total size of fragment, as well as the size of the complementary stretch(es), will ultimately depend on the intended use or application of the particular nucleic acid segment. Smaller fragments will generally find use in hybridization embodiments, wherein the length of the contiguous complementary region may be varied, such as between about 15 and about 100 nucleotides, but larger contiguous complementarity stretches may be used, according to the length complementary sequences one wishes to detect.

The use of a hybridization probe of about 15-25 nucleotides in length allows the formation of a duplex molecule that is both stable and selective. Molecules having contiguous complementary sequences over stretches greater than 15 bases in length are generally preferred, though, in order to increase stability and selectivity of the hybrid, and thereby improve the quality and degree of specific hybrid molecules obtained. One will generally prefer to design nucleic acid molecules having gene-complementary stretches of 15 to 25 contiguous nucleotides, or even longer where desired.

Hybridization probes may be selected from any portion of any of the sequences disclosed herein. All that is required is to review the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 1-111, 115-171, 173-175, 177, 179-305, 307-315, 326, 328, 330, 332-335, 340-375, 381, 382 and 384-476, 524, 526, 530, 531, 533, 535, 536, 552, 569-572, 587, 591, 593-606, 618-705, 709-774, 777 and 789, or to any continuous portion of the sequence, from about 15-25 nucleotides in length up to and including the full length sequence, that one wishes to utilize as a probe or primer. The choice of probe and primer sequences may be governed by various factors. For example, one may wish to employ primers from towards the termini of the total sequence.

Small polynucleotide segments or fragments may be readily prepared by, for example, directly synthesizing the fragment by chemical means, as is commonly practiced using an automated oligonucleotide synthesizer. Also, fragments may be obtained by application of nucleic acid reproduction technology, such as the PCR™ technology of U.S. Pat. No. 4,683,202 (incorporated herein by reference), by introducing selected sequences into recombinant vectors for recombinant production, and by other recombinant DNA techniques generally known to those of skill in the art of molecular biology.

The nucleotide sequences of the invention may be used for their ability to selectively form duplex molecules with complementary stretches of the entire gene or gene fragments of interest. Depending on the application envisioned, one will typically desire to employ varying conditions of hybridization to achieve varying degrees of selectivity of probe towards target sequence. For applications requiring high selectivity, one will typically desire to employ relatively stringent conditions to form the hybrids, e.g., one will select relatively low salt and/or high temperature conditions, such as provided by a salt concentration of from about 0.02 M to about 0.15 M salt at temperatures of from about 50° C. to about 70° C. Such selective conditions tolerate little, if any, mismatch between the probe and the template or target strand, and would be particularly suitable for isolating related sequences.

Of course, for some applications, for example, where one desires to prepare mutants employing a mutant primer strand hybridized to an underlying template, less stringent (reduced stringency) hybridization conditions will typically be needed in order to allow formation of the heteroduplex. In these circumstances, one may desire to employ salt conditions such as those of from about 0.15 M to about 0.9 M salt, at temperatures ranging from about 20° C. to about 55° C. Cross-hybridizing species can thereby be readily identified as positively hybridizing signals with respect to control hybridizations. In any case, it is generally appreciated that conditions can be rendered more stringent by the addition of increasing amounts of formamide, which serves to destabilize the hybrid duplex in the same manner as increased temperature. Thus, hybridization conditions can be readily manipulated, and thus will generally be a method of choice depending on the desired results.

Polynucleotide Identification and Characterization

Polynucleotides may be identified, prepared and/or manipulated using any of a variety of well established techniques. For example, a polynucleotide may be identified, as described in more detail below, by screening a microarray of cDNAs for tumor-associated expression (i.e., expression that is at least two fold greater in a tumor than in normal tissue, as determined using a representative assay provided herein). Such screens may be performed, for example, using a Synteni microarray (Palo Alto, Calif.) according to the manufacturer's instructions (and essentially as described by Schena et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 93:10614-10619, 1996 and Heller et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94:2150-2155, 1997). Alternatively, polynucleotides may be amplified from cDNA prepared from cells expressing the proteins described herein, such as prostate-specific cells. Such polynucleotides may be amplified via polymerase chain reaction (PCR). For this approach, sequence-specific primers may be designed based on the sequences provided herein, and may be purchased or synthesized.

An amplified portion of a polynucleotide of the present invention may be used to isolate a full length gene from a suitable library (e.g., a prostate tumor cDNA library) using well known techniques. Within such techniques, a library (cDNA or genomic) is screened using one or more polynucleotide probes or primers suitable for amplification. Preferably, a library is size-selected to include larger molecules. Random primed libraries may also be preferred for identifying 5′ and upstream regions of genes. Genomic libraries are preferred for obtaining introns and extending 5′ sequences.

For hybridization techniques, a partial sequence may be labeled (e.g., by nick-translation or end-labeling with ³²P) using well known techniques. A bacterial or bacteriophage library is then generally screened by hybridizing filters containing denatured bacterial colonies (or lawns containing phage plaques) with the labeled probe (see Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratories, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989). Hybridizing colonies or plaques are selected and expanded, and the DNA is isolated for further analysis. cDNA clones may be analyzed to determine the amount of additional sequence by, for example, PCR using a primer from the partial sequence and a primer from the vector. Restriction maps and partial sequences may be generated to identify one or more overlapping clones. The complete sequence may then be determined using standard techniques, which may involve generating a series of deletion clones. The resulting overlapping sequences can then assembled into a single contiguous sequence. A full length cDNA molecule can be generated by ligating suitable fragments, using well known techniques.

Alternatively, there are numerous amplification techniques for obtaining a full length coding sequence from a partial cDNA sequence. Within such techniques, amplification is generally performed via PCR. Any of a variety of commercially available kits may be used to perform the amplification step. Primers may be designed using, for example, software well known in the art. Primers are preferably 22-30 nucleotides in length, have a GC content of at least 50% and anneal to the target sequence at temperatures of about 68° C. to 72° C. The amplified region may be sequenced as described above, and overlapping sequences assembled into a contiguous sequence.

One such amplification technique is inverse PCR (see Triglia et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 16:8186, 1988), which uses restriction enzymes to generate a fragment in the known region of the gene. The fragment is then circularized by intramolecular ligation and used as a template for PCR with divergent primers derived from the known region. Within an alternative approach, sequences adjacent to a partial sequence may be retrieved by amplification with a primer to a linker sequence and a primer specific to a known region. The amplified sequences are typically subjected to a second round of amplification with the same linker primer and a second primer specific to the known region. A variation on this procedure, which employs two primers that initiate extension in opposite directions from the known sequence, is described in WO 96/38591. Another such technique is known as “rapid amplification of cDNA ends” or RACE. This technique involves the use of an internal primer and an external primer, which hybridizes to a polyA region or vector sequence, to identify sequences that are 5′ and 3′ of a known sequence. Additional techniques include capture PCR (Lagerstrom et al., PCR Methods Applic. 1:111-19, 1991) and walking PCR (Parker et al., Nucl. Acids. Res. 19:3055-60, 1991). Other methods employing amplification may also be employed to obtain a full length cDNA sequence.

In certain instances, it is possible to obtain a full length cDNA sequence by analysis of sequences provided in an expressed sequence tag (EST) database, such as that available from GenBank. Searches for overlapping ESTs may generally be performed using well known programs (e.g., NCBI BLAST searches), and such ESTs may be used to generate a contiguous full length sequence. Full length DNA sequences may also be obtained by analysis of genomic fragments.

Polynucleotide Expression in Host Cells

In other embodiments of the invention, polynucleotide sequences or fragments thereof which encode polypeptides of the invention, or fusion proteins or functional equivalents thereof, may be used in recombinant DNA molecules to direct expression of a polypeptide in appropriate host cells. Due to the inherent degeneracy of the genetic code, other DNA sequences that encode substantially the same or a functionally equivalent amino acid sequence may be produced and these sequences may be used to clone and express a given polypeptide.

As will be understood by those of skill in the art, it may be advantageous in some instances to produce polypeptide-encoding nucleotide sequences possessing non-naturally occurring codons. For example, codons preferred by a particular prokaryotic or eukaryotic host can be selected to increase the rate of protein expression or to produce a recombinant RNA transcript having desirable properties, such as a half-life which is longer than that of a transcript generated from the naturally occurring sequence.

Moreover, the polynucleotide sequences of the present invention can be engineered using methods generally known in the art in order to alter polypeptide encoding sequences for a variety of reasons, including but not limited to, alterations which modify the cloning, processing, and/or expression of the gene product. For example, DNA shuffling by random fragmentation and PCR reassembly of gene fragments and synthetic oligonucleotides may be used to engineer the nucleotide sequences. In addition, site-directed mutagenesis may be used to insert new restriction sites, alter glycosylation patterns, change codon preference, produce splice variants, or introduce mutations, and so forth.

In another embodiment of the invention, natural, modified, or recombinant nucleic acid sequences may be ligated to a heterologous sequence to encode a fusion protein. For example, to screen peptide libraries for inhibitors of polypeptide activity, it may be useful to encode a chimeric protein that can be recognized by a commercially available antibody. A fusion protein may also be engineered to contain a cleavage site located between the polypeptide-encoding sequence and the heterologous protein sequence, so that the polypeptide may be cleaved and purified away from the heterologous moiety.

Sequences encoding a desired polypeptide may be synthesized, in whole or in part, using chemical methods well known in the art (see Caruthers, M. H. et al. (1980) Nucl. Acids Res. Symp. Ser. 215-223, Horn, T. et al. (1980) Nucl. Acids Res. Symp. Ser. 225-232). Alternatively, the protein itself may be produced using chemical methods to synthesize the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide, or a portion thereof. For example, peptide synthesis can be performed using various solid-phase techniques (Roberge, J. Y. et al. (1995) Science 269:202-204) and automated synthesis may be achieved, for example, using the ABI 431A Peptide Synthesizer (Perkin Elmer, Palo Alto, Calif.).

A newly synthesized peptide may be substantially purified by preparative high performance liquid chromatography (e.g., Creighton, T. (1983) Proteins, Structures and Molecular Principles, WH Freeman and Co., New York, N.Y.) or other comparable techniques available in the art. The composition of the synthetic peptides may be confirmed by amino acid analysis or sequencing (e.g., the Edman degradation procedure). Additionally, the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide, or any part thereof, may be altered during direct synthesis and/or combined using chemical methods with sequences from other proteins, or any part thereof, to produce a variant polypeptide.

In order to express a desired polypeptide, the nucleotide sequences encoding the polypeptide, or functional equivalents, may be inserted into appropriate expression vector, i.e., a vector which contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted coding sequence. Methods which are well known to those skilled in the art may be used to construct expression vectors containing sequences encoding a polypeptide of interest and appropriate transcriptional and translational control elements. These methods include in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques, and in vivo genetic recombination. Such techniques are described in Sambrook, J. et al. (1989) Molecular Cloning, A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Press, Plainview, N.Y., and Ausubel, F. M. et al. (1989) Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, New York. N.Y.

A variety of expression vector/host systems may be utilized to contain and express polynucleotide sequences. These include, but are not limited to, microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid, or cosmid DNA expression vectors; yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors; insect cell systems infected with virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus); plant cell systems transformed with virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or with bacterial expression vectors (e.g., Ti or pBR322 plasmids); or animal cell systems.

The “control elements” or “regulatory sequences” present in an expression vector are those non-translated regions of the vector—enhancers, promoters, 5′ and 3′ untranslated regions—which interact with host cellular proteins to carry out transcription and translation. Such elements may vary in their strength and specificity. Depending on the vector system and host utilized, any number of suitable transcription and translation elements, including constitutive and inducible promoters, may be used. For example, when cloning in bacterial systems, inducible promoters such as the hybrid lacZ promoter of the PBLUESCRIPT phagemid (Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif.) or PSPORT1 plasmid (Gibco BRL, Gaithersburg, Md.) and the like may be used. In mammalian cell systems, promoters from mammalian genes or from mammalian viruses are generally preferred. If it is necessary to generate a cell line that contains multiple copies of the sequence encoding a polypeptide, vectors based on SV40 or EBV may be advantageously used with an appropriate selectable marker.

In bacterial systems, a number of expression vectors may be selected depending upon the use intended for the expressed polypeptide. For example, when large quantities are needed, for example for the induction of antibodies, vectors which direct high level expression of fusion proteins that are readily purified may be used. Such vectors include, but are not limited to, the multifunctional E. coli cloning and expression vectors such as BLUESCRIPT (Stratagene), in which the sequence encoding the polypeptide of interest may be ligated into the vector in frame with sequences for the amino-terminal Met and the subsequent 7 residues of .beta.-galactosidase so that a hybrid protein is produced; pIN vectors (Van Heeke, G. and S. M. Schuster (1989) J. Biol. Chem. 264:5503-5509); and the like. pGEX Vectors (Promega, Madison, Wis.) may also be used to express foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST). In general, such fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption to glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione. Proteins made in such systems may be designed to include heparin, thrombin, or factor XA protease cleavage sites so that the cloned polypeptide of interest can be released from the GST moiety at will.

In the yeast, Saccharomyces cerevisiae, a number of vectors containing constitutive or inducible promoters such as alpha factor, alcohol oxidase, and PGH may be used. For reviews, see Ausubel et al. (supra) and Grant et al. (1987) Methods Enzymol. 153:516-544.

In cases where plant expression vectors are used, the expression of sequences encoding polypeptides may be driven by any of a number of promoters. For example, viral promoters such as the 35S and 19S promoters of CaMV may be used alone or in combination with the omega leader sequence from TMV (Takamatsu, N. (1987) EMBO J. 6:307-311. Alternatively, plant promoters such as the small subunit of RUBISCO or heat shock promoters may be used (Coruzzi, G. et al. (1984) EMBO J. 3:1671-1680; Broglie, R. et al. (1984) Science 224:838-843; and Winter, J. et al. (1991) Results Probl. Cell Differ. 17:85-105). These constructs can be introduced into plant cells by direct DNA transformation or pathogen-mediated transfection. Such techniques are described in a number of generally available reviews (see, for example, Hobbs, S. or Murry, L. E. in McGraw Hill Yearbook of Science and Technology (1992) McGraw Hill, New York, N.Y.; pp. 191-196).

An insect system may also be used to express a polypeptide of interest. For example, in one such system, Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign genes in Spodoptera frugiperda cells or in Trichoplusia larvae. The sequences encoding the polypeptide may be cloned into a non-essential region of the virus, such as the polyhedrin gene, and placed under control of the polyhedrin promoter. Successful insertion of the polypeptide-encoding sequence will render the polyhedrin gene inactive and produce recombinant virus lacking coat protein. The recombinant viruses may then be used to infect, for example, S. frugiperda cells or Trichoplusia larvae in which the polypeptide of interest may be expressed (Engelhard, E. K. et al. (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 91:3224-3227).

In mammalian host cells, a number of viral-based expression systems are generally available. For example, in cases where an adenovirus is used as an expression vector, sequences encoding a polypeptide of interest may be ligated into an adenovirus transcription/translation complex consisting of the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. Insertion in a non-essential E1 or E3 region of the viral genome may be used to obtain a viable virus which is capable of expressing the polypeptide in infected host cells (Logan, J. and Shenk, T. (1984) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 81:3655-3659). In addition, transcription enhancers, such as the Rous sarcoma virus (RSV) enhancer, may be used to increase expression in mammalian host cells.

Specific initiation signals may also be used to achieve more efficient translation of sequences encoding a polypeptide of interest. Such signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. In cases where sequences encoding the polypeptide, its initiation codon, and upstream sequences are inserted into the appropriate expression vector, no additional transcriptional or translational control signals may be needed. However, in cases where only coding sequence, or a portion thereof, is inserted, exogenous translational control signals including the ATG initiation codon should be provided. Furthermore, the initiation codon should be in the correct reading frame to ensure translation of the entire insert. Exogenous translational elements and initiation codons may be of various origins, both natural and synthetic. The efficiency of expression may be enhanced by the inclusion of enhancers which are appropriate for the particular cell system which is used, such as those described in the literature (Scharf, D. et al. (1994) Results Probl. Cell Differ. 20:125-162).

In addition, a host cell strain may be chosen for its ability to modulate the expression of the inserted sequences or to process the expressed protein in the desired fashion. Such modifications of the polypeptide include, but are not limited to, acetylation, carboxylation. glycosylation, phosphorylation, lipidation, and acylation. Post-translational processing which cleaves a “prepro” form of the protein may also be used to facilitate correct insertion, folding and/or function. Different host cells such as CHO, HeLa, MDCK, HEK293, and WI38, which have specific cellular machinery and characteristic mechanisms for such post-translational activities, may be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein.

For long-term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins, stable expression is generally preferred. For example, cell lines which stably express a polynucleotide of interest may be transformed using expression vectors which may contain viral origins of replication and/or endogenous expression elements and a selectable marker gene on the same or on a separate vector. Following the introduction of the vector, cells may be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched media before they are switched to selective media. The purpose of the selectable marker is to confer resistance to selection, and its presence allows growth and recovery of cells which successfully express the introduced sequences. Resistant clones of stably transformed cells may be proliferated using tissue culture techniques appropriate to the cell type.

Any number of selection systems may be used to recover transformed cell lines. These include, but are not limited to, the herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler, M. et al. (1977) Cell 11:223-32) and adenine phosphoribosyltransferase (Lowy, I. et al. (1990) Cell 22:817-23) genes which can be employed in tk.sup.- or aprt.sup.-cells, respectively. Also, antimetabolite, antibiotic or herbicide resistance can be used as the basis for selection; for example, dhfr which confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigler, M. et al. (1980) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 77:3567-70); npt, which confers resistance to the aminoglycosides, neomycin and G-418 (Colbere-Garapin, F. et al (1981) J. Mol. Biol. 150:1-14); and als or pat, which confer resistance to chlorsulfuron and phosphinotricin acetyltransferase, respectively (Murry, supra). Additional selectable genes have been described, for example, trpB, which allows cells to utilize indole in place of tryptophan, or hisD, which allows cells to utilize histinol in place of histidine (Hartman, S. C. and R. C. Mulligan (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 85:8047-51). Recently, the use of visible markers has gained popularity with such markers as anthocyanins, beta-glucuronidase and its substrate GUS, and luciferase and its substrate luciferin, being widely used not only to identify transformants, but also to quantify the amount of transient or stable protein expression attributable to a specific vector system (Rhodes, C. A. et al. (1995) Methods Mol. Biol. 55:121-131).

Although the presence/absence of marker gene expression suggests that the gene of interest is also present, its presence and expression may need to be confirmed. For example, if the sequence encoding a polypeptide is inserted within a marker gene sequence, recombinant cells containing sequences can be identified by the absence of marker gene function. Alternatively, a marker gene can be placed in tandem with a polypeptide-encoding sequence under the control of a single promoter. Expression of the marker gene in response to induction or selection usually indicates expression of the tandem gene as well.

Alternatively, host cells which contain and express a desired polynucleotide sequence may be identified by a variety of procedures known to those of skill in the art. These procedures include, but are not limited to, DNA-DNA or DNA-RNA hybridizations and protein bioassay or immunoassay techniques which include membrane, solution, or chip based technologies for the detection and/or quantification of nucleic acid or protein.

A variety of protocols for detecting and measuring the expression of polynucleotide-encoded products, using either polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies specific for the product are known in the art. Examples include enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA), radioimmunoassay (RIA), and fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS). A two-site, monoclonal-based immunoassay utilizing monoclonal antibodies reactive to two non-interfering epitopes on a given polypeptide may be preferred for some applications, but a competitive binding assay may also be employed. These and other assays are described, among other places, in Hampton, R. et al. (1990; Serological Methods, a Laboratory Manual, APS Press, St Paul. Minn.) and Maddox, D. E. et al. (1983; J. Exp. Med. 158:1211-1216).

A wide variety of labels and conjugation techniques are known by those skilled in the art and may be used in various nucleic acid and amino acid assays. Means for producing labeled hybridization or PCR probes for detecting sequences related to polynucleotides include oligolabeling, nick translation, end-labeling or PCR amplification using a labeled nucleotide. Alternatively, the sequences, or any portions thereof may be cloned into a vector for the production of an mRNA probe. Such vectors are known in the art, are commercially available, and may be used to synthesize RNA probes in vitro by addition of an appropriate RNA polymerase such as T7, T3, or SP6 and labeled nucleotides. These procedures may be conducted using a variety of commercially available kits. Suitable reporter molecules or labels, which may be used include radionuclides, enzymes, fluorescent, chemiluminescent, or chromogenic agents as well as substrates, cofactors, inhibitors, magnetic particles, and the like.

Host cells transformed with a polynucleotide sequence of interest may be cultured under conditions suitable for the expression and recovery of the protein from cell culture. The protein produced by a recombinant cell may be secreted or contained intracellularly depending on the sequence and/or the vector used. As will be understood by those of skill in the art, expression vectors containing polynucleotides of the invention may be designed to contain signal sequences which direct secretion of the encoded polypeptide through a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell membrane. Other recombinant constructions may be used to join sequences encoding a polypeptide of interest to nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide domain which will facilitate purification of soluble proteins. Such purification facilitating domains include, but are not limited to, metal chelating peptides such as histidine-tryptophan modules that allow purification on immobilized metals, protein A domains that allow purification on immobilized immunoglobulin, and the domain utilized in the FLAGS extension/affinity purification system (Immunex Corp., Seattle, Wash.). The inclusion of cleavable linker sequences such as those specific for Factor XA or enterokinase (Invitrogen. San Diego, Calif.) between the purification domain and the encoded polypeptide may be used to facilitate purification. One such expression vector provides for expression of a fusion protein containing a polypeptide of interest and a nucleic acid encoding 6 histidine residues preceding a thioredoxin or an enterokinase cleavage site. The histidine residues facilitate purification on IMIAC (immobilized metal ion affinity chromatography) as described in Porath, J. et al. (1992, Prot. Exp. Purif. 3:263-281) while the enterokinase cleavage site provides a means for purifying the desired polypeptide from the fusion protein. A discussion of vectors which contain fusion proteins is provided in Kroll, D. J. et al. (1993; DNA Cell Biol. 12:441-453).

In addition to recombinant production methods, polypeptides of the invention, and fragments thereof, may be produced by direct peptide synthesis using solid-phase techniques (Merrifield J. (1963) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85:2149-2154). Protein synthesis may be performed using manual techniques or by automation. Automated synthesis may be achieved, for example, using Applied Biosystems 431A Peptide Synthesizer (Perkin Elmer). Alternatively, various fragments may be chemically synthesized separately and combined using chemical methods to produce the full length molecule.

Site-Specific Mutagenesis

Site-specific mutagenesis is a technique useful in the preparation of individual peptides, or biologically functional equivalent polypeptides, through specific mutagenesis of the underlying polynucleotides that encode them. The technique, well-known to those of skill in the art, further provides a ready ability to prepare and test sequence variants, for example, incorporating one or more of the foregoing considerations, by introducing one or more nucleotide sequence changes into the DNA. Site-specific mutagenesis allows the production of mutants through the use of specific oligonucleotide sequences which encode the DNA sequence of the desired mutation, as well as a sufficient number of adjacent nucleotides, to provide a primer sequence of sufficient size and sequence complexity to form a stable duplex on both sides of the deletion junction being traversed. Mutations may be employed in a selected polynucleotide sequence to improve, alter, decrease, modify, or otherwise change the properties of the polynucleotide itself, and/or alter the properties, activity, composition, stability, or primary sequence of the encoded polypeptide.

In certain embodiments of the present invention, the inventors contemplate the mutagenesis of the disclosed polynucleotide sequences to alter one or more properties of the encoded polypeptide, such as the antigenicity of a polypeptide vaccine. The techniques of site-specific mutagenesis are well-known in the art, and are widely used to create variants of both polypeptides and polynucleotides. For example, site-specific mutagenesis is often used to alter a specific portion of a DNA molecule. In such embodiments, a primer comprising typically about 14 to about 25 nucleotides or so in length is employed, with about 5 to about 10 residues on both sides of the junction of the sequence being altered.

As will be appreciated by those of skill in the art, site-specific mutagenesis techniques have often employed a phage vector that exists in both a single stranded and double stranded form. Typical vectors useful in site-directed mutagenesis include vectors such as the M13 phage. These phage are readily commercially-available and their use is generally well-known to those skilled in the art. Double-stranded plasmids are also routinely employed in site directed mutagenesis that eliminates the step of transferring the gene of interest from a plasmid to a phage.

In general, site-directed mutagenesis in accordance herewith is performed by first obtaining a single-stranded vector or melting apart of two strands of a double-stranded vector that includes within its sequence a DNA sequence that encodes the desired peptide. An oligonucleotide primer bearing the desired mutated sequence is prepared, generally synthetically. This primer is then annealed with the single-stranded vector, and subjected to DNA polymerizing enzymes such as E. coli polymerase I Klenow fragment, in order to complete the synthesis of the mutation-bearing strand. Thus, a heteroduplex is formed wherein one strand encodes the original non-mutated sequence and the second strand bears the desired mutation. This heteroduplex vector is then used to transform appropriate cells, such as E. coli cells, and clones are selected which include recombinant vectors bearing the mutated sequence arrangement.

The preparation of sequence variants of the selected peptide-encoding DNA segments using site-directed mutagenesis provides a means of producing potentially useful species and is not meant to be limiting as there are other ways in which sequence variants of peptides and the DNA sequences encoding them may be obtained. For example, recombinant vectors encoding the desired peptide sequence may be treated with mutagenic agents, such as hydroxylamine, to obtain sequence variants. Specific details regarding these methods and protocols are found in the teachings of Maloy et al., 1994; Segal, 1976; Prokop and Bajpai, 1991; Kuby, 1994; and Maniatis et al., 1982, each incorporated herein by reference, for that purpose.

As used herein, the term “oligonucleotide directed mutagenesis procedure” refers to template-dependent processes and vector-mediated propagation which result in an increase in the concentration of a specific nucleic acid molecule relative to its initial concentration, or in an increase in the concentration of a detectable signal, such as amplification. As used herein, the term “oligonucleotide directed mutagenesis procedure” is intended to refer to a process that involves the template-dependent extension of a primer molecule. The term template dependent process refers to nucleic acid synthesis of an RNA or a DNA molecule wherein the sequence of the newly synthesized strand of nucleic acid is dictated by the well-known rules of complementary base pairing (see, for example, Watson, 1987). Typically, vector mediated methodologies involve the introduction of the nucleic acid fragment into a DNA or RNA vector, the clonal amplification of the vector, and the recovery of the amplified nucleic acid fragment. Examples of such methodologies are provided by U.S. Pat. No. 4,237,224, specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

Polynucleotide Amplification Techniques

A number of template dependent processes are available to amplify the target sequences of interest present in a sample. One of the best known amplification methods is the polymerase chain reaction (PCR™) which is described in detail in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,683,195, 4,683,202 and 4,800,159, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Briefly, in PCR™, two primer sequences are prepared which are complementary to regions on opposite complementary strands of the target sequence. An excess of deoxynucleoside triphosphates is added to a reaction mixture along with a DNA polymerase (e.g., Taq polymerase). If the target sequence is present in a sample, the primers will bind to the target and the polymerase will cause the primers to be extended along the target sequence by adding on nucleotides. By raising and lowering the temperature of the reaction mixture, the extended primers will dissociate from the target to form reaction products, excess primers will bind to the target and to the reaction product and the process is repeated. Preferably reverse transcription and PCR™ amplification procedure may be performed in order to quantify the amount of mRNA amplified. Polymerase chain reaction methodologies are well known in the art.

Another method for amplification is the ligase chain reaction (referred to as LCR), disclosed in Eur. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. 320,308 (specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). In LCR, two complementary probe pairs are prepared, and in the presence of the target sequence, each pair will bind to opposite complementary strands of the target such that they abut. In the presence of a ligase, the two probe pairs will link to form a single unit. By temperature cycling, as in PCR™, bound ligated units dissociate from the target and then serve as “target sequences” for ligation of excess probe pairs. U.S. Pat. No. 4,883,750, incorporated herein by reference in its entirety, describes an alternative method of amplification similar to LCR for binding probe pairs to a target sequence.

Qbeta Replicase, described in PCT Intl. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. PCT/US87/00880, incorporated herein by reference in its entirety, may also be used as still another amplification method in the present invention. In this method, a replicative sequence of RNA that has a region complementary to that of a target is added to a sample in the presence of an RNA polymerase. The polymerase will copy the replicative sequence that can then be detected.

An isothermal amplification method, in which restriction endonucleases and ligases are used to achieve the amplification of target molecules that contain nucleotide 5′-[α-thio]triphosphates in one strand of a restriction site (Walker et al., 1992, incorporated herein by reference in its entirety), may also be useful in the amplification of nucleic acids in the present invention.

Strand Displacement Amplification (SDA) is another method of carrying out isothermal amplification of nucleic acids which involves multiple rounds of strand displacement and synthesis, i.e. nick translation. A similar method, called Repair Chain Reaction (RCR) is another method of amplification which may be useful in the present invention and is involves annealing several probes throughout a region targeted for amplification, followed by a repair reaction in which only two of the four bases are present. The other two bases can be added as biotinylated derivatives for easy detection. A similar approach is used in SDA.

Sequences can also be detected using a cyclic probe reaction (CPR). In CPR, a probe having a 3′ and 5′ sequences of non-target DNA and an internal or “middle” sequence of the target protein specific RNA is hybridized to DNA which is present in a sample. Upon hybridization, the reaction is treated with RNaseH, and the products of the probe are identified as distinctive products by generating a signal that is released after digestion. The original template is annealed to another cycling probe and the reaction is repeated. Thus, CPR involves amplifying a signal generated by hybridization of a probe to a target gene specific expressed nucleic acid.

Still other amplification methods described in Great Britain Pat. Appl. No. 2 202 328, and in PCT Intl. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. PCT/US89/01025, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety, may be used in accordance with the present invention. In the former application, “modified” primers are used in a PCR-like, template and enzyme dependent synthesis. The primers may be modified by labeling with a capture moiety (e.g., biotin) and/or a detector moiety (e.g., enzyme). In the latter application, an excess of labeled probes is added to a sample. In the presence of the target sequence, the probe binds and is cleaved catalytically. After cleavage, the target sequence is released intact to be bound by excess probe. Cleavage of the labeled probe signals the presence of the target sequence.

Other nucleic acid amplification procedures include transcription-based amplification systems (TAS) (Kwoh et al., 1989; PCT Intl. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 88/10315, incorporated herein by reference in its entirety), including nucleic acid sequence based amplification (NASBA) and 3SR. In NASBA, the nucleic acids can be prepared for amplification by standard phenol/chloroform extraction, heat denaturation of a sample, treatment with lysis buffer and minispin columns for isolation of DNA and RNA or guanidinium chloride extraction of RNA. These amplification techniques involve annealing a primer that has sequences specific to the target sequence. Following polymerization, DNA/RNA hybrids are digested with RNase H while double stranded DNA molecules are heat-denatured again. In either case the single stranded DNA is made fully double stranded by addition of second target-specific primer, followed by polymerization. The double stranded DNA molecules are then multiply transcribed by a polymerase such as T7 or SP6. In an isothermal cyclic reaction, the RNAs are reverse transcribed into DNA, and transcribed once again with a polymerase such as T7 or SP6. The resulting products, whether truncated or complete, indicate target-specific sequences.

Eur. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. 329,822, incorporated herein by reference in its entirety, disclose a nucleic acid amplification process involving cyclically synthesizing single-stranded RNA (“ssRNA”), ssDNA, and double-stranded DNA (dsDNA), which may be used in accordance with the present invention. The ssRNA is a first template for a first primer oligonucleotide, which is elongated by reverse transcriptase (RNA-dependent DNA polymerase). The RNA is then removed from resulting DNA:RNA duplex by the action of ribonuclease H (RNase H, an RNase specific for RNA in a duplex with either DNA or RNA). The resultant ssDNA is a second template for a second primer, which also includes the sequences of an RNA polymerase promoter (exemplified by T7 RNA polymerase) 5′ to its homology to its template. This primer is then extended by DNA polymerase (exemplified by the large “Klenow” fragment of E. coli DNA polymerase I), resulting as a double-stranded DNA (“dsDNA”) molecule, having a sequence identical to that of the original RNA between the primers and having additionally, at one end, a promoter sequence. This promoter sequence can be used by the appropriate RNA polymerase to make many RNA copies of the DNA. These copies can then re-enter the cycle leading to very swift amplification. With proper choice of enzymes, this amplification can be done isothermally without addition of enzymes at each cycle. Because of the cyclical nature of this process, the starting sequence can be chosen to be in the form of either DNA or RNA.

PCT Intl. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 89/06700, incorporated herein by reference in its entirety, disclose a nucleic acid sequence amplification scheme based on the hybridization of a promoter/primer sequence to a target single-stranded DNA (“ssDNA”) followed by transcription of many RNA copies of the sequence. This scheme is not cyclic; i.e. new templates are not produced from the resultant RNA transcripts. Other amplification methods include “RACE” (Frohman, 1990), and “one-sided PCR” (Ohara, 1989) which are well-known to those of skill in the art.

Methods based on ligation of two (or more) oligonucleotides in the presence of nucleic acid having the sequence of the resulting “di-oligonucleotide”, thereby amplifying the di-oligonucleotide (Wu and Dean, 1996, incorporated herein by reference in its entirety), may also be used in the amplification of DNA sequences of the present invention.

Biological Functional Equivalents

Modification and changes may be made in the structure of the polynucleotides and polypeptides of the present invention and still obtain a functional molecule that encodes a polypeptide with desirable characteristics. As mentioned above, it is often desirable to introduce one or more mutations into a specific polynucleotide sequence. In certain circumstances, the resulting encoded polypeptide sequence is altered by this mutation, or in other cases, the sequence of the polypeptide is unchanged by one or more mutations in the encoding polynucleotide.

When it is desirable to alter the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide to create an equivalent, or even an improved, second-generation molecule, the amino acid changes may be achieved by changing one or more of the codons of the encoding DNA sequence, according to Table 1.

For example, certain amino acids may be substituted for other amino acids in a protein structure without appreciable loss of interactive binding capacity with structures such as, for example, antigen-binding regions of antibodies or binding sites on substrate molecules. Since it is the interactive capacity and nature of a protein that defines that protein's biological functional activity, certain amino acid sequence substitutions can be made in a protein sequence, and, of course, its underlying DNA coding sequence, and nevertheless obtain a protein with like properties. It is thus contemplated by the inventors that various changes may be made in the peptide sequences of the disclosed compositions, or corresponding DNA sequences which encode said peptides without appreciable loss of their biological utility or activity.

TABLE 1 Amino Acids Codons Alanine Ala A GCA GCC GCG GCU Cysteine Cys C UGC UGU Aspartic acid Asp D GAC GAU Glutamic acid Glu E GAA GAG Phenylalanine Phe F UUC UUU Glycine Gly G GGA GGC GGG GGU Histidine His H CAC CAU Isoleucine Ile I AUA AUC AUU Lysine Lys K AAA AAG Leucine Leu L UUA UUG CUA CUC CUG CUU Methionine Met M AUG Asparagine Asn N AAC AAU Proline Pro P CCA CCC CCG CCU Glutamine Gln Q CAA CAG Arginine Arg R AGA AGG CGA CGC CGG CGU Serine Ser S AGC AGU UCA UCC UCG UCU Threonine Thr T ACA ACC ACG ACU Valine Val V GUA GUC GUG GUU Tryptophan Trp W UGG Tyrosine Tyr Y UAC UAU

In making such changes, the hydropathic index of amino acids may be considered. The importance of the hydropathic amino acid index in conferring interactive biologic function on a protein is generally understood in the art (Kyte and Doolittle, 1982, incorporated herein by reference). It is accepted that the relative hydropathic character of the amino acid contributes to the secondary structure of the resultant protein, which in turn defines the interaction of the protein with other molecules, for example, enzymes, substrates, receptors, DNA, antibodies, antigens, and the like. Each amino acid has been assigned a hydropathic index on the basis of its hydrophobicity and charge characteristics (Kyte and Doolittle, 1982). These values are: isoleucine (+4.5); valine (+4.2); leucine (+3.8); phenylalanine (+2.8); cysteine/cystine (+2.5); methionine (+1.9); alanine (+1.8); glycine (−0.4); threonine (−0.7); serine (−0.8); tryptophan (−0.9); tyrosine (−1.3); proline (−1.6); histidine (−3.2); glutamate (−3.5); glutamine (−3.5); aspartate (−3.5); asparagine (−3.5); lysine (−3.9); and arginine (−4.5).

It is known in the art that certain amino acids may be substituted by other amino acids having a similar hydropathic index or score and still result in a protein with similar biological activity, i.e. still obtain a biological functionally equivalent protein. In making such changes, the substitution of amino acids whose hydropathic indices are within ±2 is preferred, those within ±1 are particularly preferred, and those within ±0.5 are even more particularly preferred. It is also understood in the art that the substitution of like amino acids can be made effectively on the basis of hydrophilicity. U.S. Pat. No. 4,554,101 (specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety), states that the greatest local average hydrophilicity of a protein, as governed by the hydrophilicity of its adjacent amino acids, correlates with a biological property of the protein.

As detailed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,554,101, the following hydrophilicity values have been assigned to amino acid residues: arginine (+3.0); lysine (+3.0); aspartate (+3.0±1); glutamate (+3.0±1); serine (±0.3); asparagine (+0.2); glutamine (+0.2); glycine (0); threonine (−0.4); proline (−0.5±1); alanine (−0.5); histidine (−0.5); cysteine (−1.0); methionine (−1.3); valine (−1.5); leucine. (−1.8); isoleucine (−1.8); tyrosine (−2.3); phenylalanine (−2.5); tryptophan (−3.4). It is understood that an amino acid can be substituted for another having a similar hydrophilicity value and still obtain a biologically equivalent, and in particular, an immunologically equivalent protein. In such changes, the substitution of amino acids whose hydrophilicity values are within ±2 is preferred, those within ±1 are particularly preferred, and those within ±0.5 are even more particularly preferred.

As outlined above, amino acid substitutions are generally therefore based on the relative similarity of the amino acid side-chain substituents, for example, their hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, charge, size, and the like. Exemplary substitutions that take various of the foregoing characteristics into consideration are well known to those of skill in the art and include: arginine and lysine; glutamate and aspartate; serine and threonine; glutamine and asparagine; and valine, leucine and isoleucine.

In addition, any polynucleotide may be further modified to increase stability in vivo. Possible modifications include, but are not limited to, the addition of flanking sequences at the 5′ and/or 3′ ends; the use of phosphorothioate or 2′ O-methyl rather than phosphodiesterase linkages in the backbone; and/or the inclusion of nontraditional bases such as inosine, queosine and wybutosine, as well as acetyl-methyl-, thio- and other modified forms of adenine, cytidine, guanine, thymine and uridine.

In Vivo Polynucleotide Delivery Techniques

In additional embodiments, genetic constructs comprising one or more of the polynucleotides of the invention are introduced into cells in vivo. This may be achieved using any of a variety or well known approaches, several of which are outlined below for the purpose of illustration.

1. Adenovirus

One of the preferred methods for in vivo delivery of one or more nucleic acid sequences involves the use of an adenovirus expression vector. “Adenovirus expression vector” is meant to include those constructs containing adenovirus sequences sufficient to (a) support packaging of the construct and (b) to express a polynucleotide that has been cloned therein in a sense or antisense orientation. Of course, in the context of an antisense construct, expression does not require that the gene product be synthesized.

The expression vector comprises a genetically engineered form of an adenovirus. Knowledge of the genetic organization of adenovirus, a 36 kb, linear, double-stranded DNA virus, allows substitution of large pieces of adenoviral DNA with foreign sequences up to 7 kb (Grunhaus and Horwitz, 1992). In contrast to retrovirus, the adenoviral infection of host cells does not result in chromosomal integration because adenoviral DNA can replicate in an episomal manner without potential genotoxicity. Also, adenoviruses are structurally stable, and no genome rearrangement has been detected after extensive amplification. Adenovirus can infect virtually all epithelial cells regardless of their cell cycle stage. So far, adenoviral infection appears to be linked only to mild disease such as acute respiratory disease in humans.

Adenovirus is particularly suitable for use as a gene transfer vector because of its mid-sized genome, ease of manipulation, high titer, wide target-cell range and high infectivity. Both ends of the viral genome contain 100-200 base pair inverted repeats (ITRs), which are cis elements necessary for viral DNA replication and packaging. The early (E) and late (L) regions of the genome contain different transcription units that are divided by the onset of viral DNA replication. The E1 region (E1A and E1B) encodes proteins responsible for the regulation of transcription of the viral genome and a few cellular genes. The expression of the E2 region (E2A and E2B) results in the synthesis of the proteins for viral DNA replication. These proteins are involved in DNA replication, late gene expression and host cell shut-off (Renan, 1990). The products of the late genes, including the majority of the viral capsid proteins, are expressed only after significant processing of a single primary transcript issued by the major late promoter (MLP). The MLP, (located at 16.8 m.u.) is particularly efficient during the late phase of infection, and all the mRNA's issued from this promoter possess a 5′-tripartite leader (TPL) sequence which makes them preferred mRNA's for translation.

In a current system, recombinant adenovirus is generated from homologous recombination between shuttle vector and provirus vector. Due to the possible recombination between two proviral vectors, wild-type adenovirus may be generated from this process. Therefore, it is critical to isolate a single clone of virus from an individual plaque and examine its genomic structure.

Generation and propagation of the current adenovirus vectors, which are replication deficient, depend on a unique helper cell line, designated 293, which was transformed from human embryonic kidney cells by Ad5 DNA fragments and constitutively expresses E1 proteins (Graham et al., 1977). Since the E3 region is dispensable from the adenovirus genome (Jones and Shenk, 1978), the current adenovirus vectors, with the help of 293 cells, carry foreign DNA in either the E1, the D3 or both regions (Graham and Prevec, 1991). In nature, adenovirus can package approximately 105% of the wild-type genome (Ghosh-Choudhury et al., 1987), providing capacity for about 2 extra kB of DNA. Combined with the approximately 5.5 kB of DNA that is replaceable in the E1 and E3 regions, the maximum capacity of the current adenovirus vector is under 7.5 kB, or about 15% of the total length of the vector. More than 80% of the adenovirus viral genome remains in the vector backbone and is the source of vector-borne cytotoxicity. Also, the replication deficiency of the E1-deleted virus is incomplete. For example, leakage of viral gene expression has been observed with the currently available vectors at high multiplicities of infection (MOI) (Mulligan, 1993).

Helper cell lines may be derived from human cells such as human embryonic kidney cells, muscle cells, hematopoietic cells or other human embryonic mesenchymal or epithelial cells. Alternatively, the helper cells may be derived from the cells of other mammalian species that are permissive for human adenovirus. Such cells include, e.g., Vero cells or other monkey embryonic mesenchymal or epithelial cells. As stated above, the currently preferred helper cell line is 293.

Recently, Racher et al. (1995) disclosed improved methods for culturing 293 cells and propagating adenovirus. In one format, natural cell aggregates are grown by inoculating individual cells into 1 liter siliconized spinner flasks (Techne, Cambridge, UK) containing 100-200 ml of medium. Following stirring at 40 rpm, the cell viability is estimated with trypan blue. In another format, Fibra-Cel microcarriers (Bibby Sterlin, Stone, UK) (5 g/l) is employed as follows. A cell inoculum, resuspended in 5 ml of medium, is added to the carrier (50 ml) in a 250 ml Erlenmeyer flask and left stationary, with occasional agitation, for 1 to 4 h. The medium is then replaced with 50 ml of fresh medium and shaking initiated. For virus production, cells are allowed to grow to about 80% confluence, after which time the medium is replaced (to 25% of the final volume) and adenovirus added at an MOI of 0.05. Cultures are left stationary overnight, following which the volume is increased to 100% and shaking commenced for another 72 h.

Other than the requirement that the adenovirus vector be replication defective, or at least conditionally defective, the nature of the adenovirus vector is not believed to be crucial to the successful practice of the invention. The adenovirus may be of any of the 42 different known serotypes or subgroups A-F. Adenovirus type 5 of subgroup C is the preferred starting material in order to obtain a conditional replication-defective adenovirus vector for use in the present invention, since Adenovirus type 5 is a human adenovirus about which a great deal of biochemical and genetic information is known, and it has historically been used for most constructions employing adenovirus as a vector.

As stated above, the typical vector according to the present invention is replication defective and will not have an adenovirus E1 region. Thus, it will be most convenient to introduce the polynucleotide encoding the gene of interest at the position from which the E1-coding sequences have been removed. However, the position of insertion of the construct within the adenovirus sequences is not critical to the invention. The polynucleotide encoding the gene of interest may also be inserted in lieu of the deleted E3 region in E3 replacement vectors as described by Karlsson et al. (1986) or in the E4 region where a helper cell line or helper virus complements the E4 defect.

Adenovirus is easy to grow and manipulate and exhibits broad host range in vitro and in vivo. This group of viruses can be obtained in high titers, e.g., 10⁹-10¹¹ plaque-forming units per ml, and they are highly infective. The life cycle of adenovirus does not require integration into the host cell genome. The foreign genes delivered by adenovirus vectors are episomal and, therefore, have low genotoxicity to host cells. No side effects have been reported in studies of vaccination with wild-type adenovirus (Couch et al., 1963; Top et al., 1971), demonstrating their safety and therapeutic potential as in vivo gene transfer vectors.

Adenovirus vectors have been used in eukaryotic gene expression (Levrero et al., 1991; Gomez-Foix et al., 1992) and vaccine development (Grunhaus and Horwitz, 1992; Graham and Prevec, 1992). Recently, animal studies suggested that recombinant adenovirus could be used for gene therapy (Stratford-Perricaudet and Perricaudet, 1991; Stratford-Perricaudet et al., 1990; Rich et al., 1993). Studies in administering recombinant adenovirus to different tissues include trachea instillation (Rosenfeld et al., 1991; Rosenfeld et al., 1992), muscle injection (Ragot et al., 1993), peripheral intravenous injections (Herz and Gerard, 1993) and stereotactic inoculation into the brain (Le Gal La Salle et al., 1993).

2. Retroviruses

The retroviruses are a group of single-stranded RNA viruses characterized by an ability to convert their RNA to double-stranded DNA in infected cells by a process of reverse-transcription (Coffin, 1990). The resulting DNA then stably integrates into cellular chromosomes as a provirus and directs synthesis of viral proteins. The integration results in the retention of the viral gene sequences in the recipient cell and its descendants. The retroviral genome contains three genes, gag, pol, and env that code for capsid proteins, polymerase enzyme, and envelope components, respectively. A sequence found upstream from the gag gene contains a signal for packaging of the genome into virions. Two long terminal repeat (LTR) sequences are present at the 5′ and 3′ ends of the viral genome. These contain strong promoter and enhancer sequences and are also required for integration in the host cell genome (Coffin, 1990).

In order to construct a retroviral vector, a nucleic acid encoding one or more oligonucleotide or polynucleotide sequences of interest is inserted into the viral genome in the place of certain viral sequences to produce a virus that is replication-defective. In order to produce virions, a packaging cell line containing the gag, pol, and env genes but without the LTR and packaging components is constructed (Mann et al., 1983). When a recombinant plasmid containing a cDNA, together with the retroviral LTR and packaging sequences is introduced into this cell line (by calcium phosphate precipitation for example), the packaging sequence allows the RNA transcript of the recombinant plasmid to be packaged into viral particles, which are then secreted into the culture media (Nicolas and Rubenstein, 1988; Temin, 1986; Mann et al., 1983). The media containing the recombinant retroviruses is then collected, optionally concentrated, and used for gene transfer. Retroviral vectors are able to infect a broad variety of cell types. However, integration and stable expression require the division of host cells (Paskind et al., 1975).

A novel approach designed to allow specific targeting of retrovirus vectors was recently developed based on the chemical modification of a retrovirus by the chemical addition of lactose residues to the viral envelope. This modification could permit the specific infection of hepatocytes via sialoglycoprotein receptors.

A different approach to targeting of recombinant retroviruses was designed in which biotinylated antibodies against a retroviral envelope protein and against a specific cell receptor were used. The antibodies were coupled via the biotin components by using streptavidin (Roux et al., 1989). Using antibodies against major histocompatibility complex class I and class II antigens, they demonstrated the infection of a variety of human cells that bore those surface antigens with an ecotropic virus in vitro (Roux et al., 1989).

3. Adeno-Associated Viruses

AAV (Ridgeway, 1988; Hermonat and Muzycska, 1984) is a parovirus, discovered as a contamination of adenoviral stocks. It is a ubiquitous virus (antibodies are present in 85% of the US human population) that has not been linked to any disease. It is also classified as a dependovirus, because its replications is dependent on the presence of a helper virus, such as adenovirus. Five serotypes have been isolated, of which AAV-2 is the best characterized. AAV has a single-stranded linear DNA that is encapsidated into capsid proteins VP1, VP2 and VP3 to form an icosahedral virion of 20 to 24 nm in diameter (Muzyczka and McLaughlin, 1988).

The AAV DNA is approximately 4.7 kilobases long. It contains two open reading frames and is flanked by two ITRs. There are two major genes in the AAV genome: rep and cap. The rep gene codes for proteins responsible for viral replications, whereas cap codes for capsid protein VP1-3. Each ITR forms a T-shaped hairpin structure. These terminal repeats are the only essential cis components of the AAV for chromosomal integration. Therefore, the AAV can be used as a vector with all viral coding sequences removed and replaced by the cassette of genes for delivery. Three viral promoters have been identified and named p5, p19, and p40, according to their map position. Transcription from p5 and p19 results in production of rep proteins, and transcription from p40 produces the capsid proteins (Hermonat and Muzyczka, 1984).

There are several factors that prompted researchers to study the possibility of using rAAV as an expression vector One is that the requirements for delivering a gene to integrate into the host chromosome are surprisingly few. It is necessary to have the 145-bp ITRs, which are only 6% of the AAV genome. This leaves room in the vector to assemble a 4.5-kb DNA insertion. While this carrying capacity may prevent the AAV from delivering large genes, it is amply suited for delivering the antisense constructs of the present invention.

AAV is also a good choice of delivery vehicles due to its safety. There is a relatively complicated rescue mechanism: not only wild type adenovirus but also AAV genes are required to mobilize rAAV. Likewise, AAV is not pathogenic and not associated with any disease. The removal of viral coding sequences minimizes immune reactions to viral gene expression, and therefore, rAAV does not evoke an inflammatory response.

4. Other Viral Vectors as Expression Constructs

Other viral vectors may be employed as expression constructs in the present invention for the delivery of oligonucleotide or polynucleotide sequences to a host cell. Vectors derived from viruses such as vaccinia virus (Ridgeway, 1988; Coupar et al., 1988), lentiviruses, polio viruses and herpes viruses may be employed. They offer several attractive features for various mammalian cells (Friedmann, 1989; Ridgeway, 1988; Coupar et al., 1988; Horwich et al., 1990).

With the recent recognition of defective hepatitis B viruses, new insight was gained into the structure-function relationship of different viral sequences. In vitro studies showed that the virus could retain the ability for helper-dependent packaging and reverse transcription despite the deletion of up to 80% of its genome (Horwich et al., 1990). This suggested that large portions of the genome could be replaced with foreign genetic material. The hepatotropism and persistence (integration) were particularly attractive properties for liver-directed gene transfer. Chang et al. (1991) introduced the chloramphenicol acetyltransferase (CAT) gene into duck hepatitis B virus genome in the place of the polymerase, surface, and pre-surface coding sequences. It was cotransfected with wild-type virus into an avian hepatoma cell line. Culture media containing high titers of the recombinant virus were used to infect primary duckling hepatocytes. Stable CAT gene expression was detected for at least 24 days after transfection (Chang et al., 1991).

5. Non-Viral Vectors

In order to effect expression of the oligonucleotide or polynucleotide sequences of the present invention, the expression construct must be delivered into a cell. This delivery may be accomplished in vitro, as in laboratory procedures for transforming cells lines, or in vivo or ex vivo, as in the treatment of certain disease states. As described above, one preferred mechanism for delivery is via viral infection where the expression construct is encapsulated in an infectious viral particle.

Once the expression construct has been delivered into the cell the nucleic acid encoding the desired oligonucleotide or polynucleotide sequences may be positioned and expressed at different sites. In certain embodiments, the nucleic acid encoding the construct may be stably integrated into the genome of the cell. This integration may be in the specific location and orientation via homologous recombination (gene replacement) or it may be integrated in a random, non-specific location (gene augmentation). In yet further embodiments, the nucleic acid may be stably maintained in the cell as a separate, episomal segment of DNA. Such nucleic acid segments or “episomes” encode sequences sufficient to permit maintenance and replication independent of or in synchronization with the host cell cycle. How the expression construct is delivered to a cell and where in the cell the nucleic acid remains is dependent on the type of expression construct employed.

In certain embodiments of the invention, the expression construct comprising one or more oligonucleotide or polynucleotide sequences may simply consist of naked recombinant DNA or plasmids. Transfer of the construct may be performed by any of the methods mentioned above which physically or chemically permeabilize the cell membrane. This is particularly applicable for transfer in vitro but it may be applied to in vivo use as well. Dubensky et al. (1984) successfully injected polyomavirus DNA in the form of calcium phosphate precipitates into liver and spleen of adult and newborn mice demonstrating active viral replication and acute infection. Benvenisty and Reshef (1986) also demonstrated that direct intraperitoneal injection of calcium phosphate-precipitated plasmids results in expression of the transfected genes. It is envisioned that DNA encoding a gene of interest may also be transferred in a similar manner in vivo and express the gene product.

Another embodiment of the invention for transferring a naked DNA expression construct into cells may involve particle bombardment. This method depends on the ability to accelerate DNA-coated microprojectiles to a high velocity allowing them to pierce cell membranes and enter cells without killing them (Klein et al., 1987). Several devices for accelerating small particles have been developed. One such device relies on a high voltage discharge to generate an electrical current, which in turn provides the motive force (Yang et al., 1990). The microprojectiles used have consisted of biologically inert substances such as tungsten or gold beads.

Selected organs including the liver, skin, and muscle tissue of rats and mice have been bombarded in vivo (Yang et al., 1990; Zelenin et al., 1991). This may require surgical exposure of the tissue or cells, to eliminate any intervening tissue between the gun and the target organ, i.e. ex vivo treatment. Again, DNA encoding a particular gene may be delivered via this method and still be incorporated by the present invention.

Antisense Oligonucleotides

The end result of the flow of genetic information is the synthesis of protein. DNA is transcribed by polymerases into messenger RNA and translated on the ribosome to yield a folded, functional protein. Thus there are several steps along the route where protein synthesis can be inhibited. The native DNA segment coding for a polypeptide described herein, as all such mammalian DNA strands, has two strands: a sense strand and an antisense strand held together by hydrogen bonding. The messenger RNA coding for polypeptide has the same nucleotide sequence as the sense DNA strand except that the DNA thymidine is replaced by uridine. Thus, synthetic antisense nucleotide sequences will bind to a mRNA and inhibit expression of the protein encoded by that mRNA.

The targeting of antisense oligonucleotides to mRNA is thus one mechanism to shut down protein synthesis, and, consequently, represents a powerful and targeted therapeutic approach. For example, the synthesis of polygalactauronase and the muscarine type 2 acetylcholine receptor are inhibited by antisense oligonucleotides directed to their respective mRNA sequences (U.S. Pat. No. 5,739,119 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,759,829, each specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Further, examples of antisense inhibition have been demonstrated with the nuclear protein cyclin, the multiple drug resistance gene (MDG1), ICAM-1, E-selectin, STK-1, striatal GABA_(A) receptor and human EGF (Jaskulski et al., 1988; Vasanthakumar and Ahmed, 1989; Peris et al., 1998; U.S. Pat. No. 5,801,154; U.S. Pat. No. 5,789,573; U.S. Pat. No. 5,718,709 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,610,288, each specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Antisense constructs have also been described that inhibit and can be used to treat a variety of abnormal cellular proliferations, e.g. cancer (U.S. Pat. No. 5,747,470; U.S. Pat. No. 5,591,317 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,783,683, each specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).

Therefore, in exemplary embodiments, the invention provides oligonucleotide sequences that comprise all, or a portion of, any sequence that is capable of specifically binding to polynucleotide sequence described herein, or a complement thereof. In one embodiment, the antisense oligonucleotides comprise DNA or derivatives thereof. In another embodiment, the oligonucleotides comprise RNA or derivatives thereof. In a third embodiment, the oligonucleotides are modified DNAs comprising a phosphorothioated modified backbone. In a fourth embodiment, the oligonucleotide sequences comprise peptide nucleic acids or derivatives thereof. In each case, preferred compositions comprise a sequence region that is complementary, and more preferably substantially-complementary, and even more preferably, completely complementary to one or more portions of polynucleotides disclosed herein.

Selection of antisense compositions specific for a given gene sequence is based upon analysis of the chosen target sequence (i.e. in these illustrative examples the rat and human sequences) and determination of secondary structure, T_(m), binding energy, relative stability, and antisense compositions were selected based upon their relative inability to form dimers, hairpins, or other secondary structures that would reduce or prohibit specific binding to the target mRNA in a host cell.

Highly preferred target regions of the mRNA, are those which are at or near the AUG translation initiation codon, and those sequences which were substantially complementary to 5′ regions of the mRNA. These secondary structure analyses and target site selection considerations were performed using v.4 of the OLIGO primer analysis software (Rychlik, 1997) and the BLASTN 2.0.5 algorithm software (Altschul et al., 1997).

The use of an antisense delivery method employing a short peptide vector, termed MPG (27 residues), is also contemplated. The MPG peptide contains a hydrophobic domain derived from the fusion sequence of HIV gp41 and a hydrophilic domain from the nuclear localization sequence of SV40 T-antigen (Morris et al., 1997). It has been demonstrated that several molecules of the MPG peptide coat the antisense oligonucleotides and can be delivered into cultured mammalian cells in less than 1 hour with relatively high efficiency (90%). Further, the interaction with MPG strongly increases both the stability of the oligonucleotide to nuclease and the ability to cross the plasma membrane (Morris et al., 1997).

Ribozymes

Although proteins traditionally have been used for catalysis of nucleic acids, another class of macromolecules has emerged as useful in this endeavor. Ribozymes are RNA-protein complexes that cleave nucleic acids in a site-specific fashion. Ribozymes have specific catalytic domains that possess endonuclease activity (Kim and Cech, 1987; Gerlach et al., 1987; Forster and Symons, 1987). For example, a large number of ribozymes accelerate phosphoester transfer reactions with a high degree of specificity, often cleaving only one of several phosphoesters in an oligonucleotide substrate (Cech et al., 1981; Michel and Westhof, 1990; Reinhold-Hurek and Shub, 1992). This specificity has been attributed to the requirement that the substrate bind via specific base-pairing interactions to the internal guide sequence (“IGS”) of the ribozyme prior to chemical reaction.

Ribozyme catalysis has primarily been observed as part of sequence-specific cleavage/ligation reactions involving nucleic acids (Joyce, 1989; Cech et al., 1981). For example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,354,855 (specifically incorporated herein by reference) reports that certain ribozymes can act as endonucleases with a sequence specificity greater than that of known ribonucleases and approaching that of the DNA restriction enzymes. Thus, sequence-specific ribozyme-mediated inhibition of gene expression may be particularly suited to therapeutic applications (Scanlon et al., 1991; Sarver et al., 1990). Recently, it was reported that ribozymes elicited genetic changes in some cells lines to which they were applied; the altered genes included the oncogenes H-ras, c-fos and genes of HIV. Most of this work involved the modification of a target mRNA, based on a specific mutant codon that is cleaved by a specific ribozyme.

Six basic varieties of naturally-occurring enzymatic RNAs are known presently. Each can catalyze the hydrolysis of RNA phosphodiester bonds in trans (and thus can cleave other RNA molecules) under physiological conditions. In general, enzymatic nucleic acids act by first binding to a target RNA. Such binding occurs through the target binding portion of a enzymatic nucleic acid which is held in close proximity to an enzymatic portion of the molecule that acts to cleave the target RNA. Thus, the enzymatic nucleic acid first recognizes and then binds a target RNA through complementary base-pairing, and once bound to the correct site, acts enzymatically to cut the target RNA. Strategic cleavage of such a target RNA will destroy its ability to direct synthesis of an encoded protein. After an enzymatic nucleic acid has bound and cleaved its RNA target, it is released from that RNA to search for another target and can repeatedly bind and cleave new targets.

The enzymatic nature of a ribozyme is advantageous over many technologies, such as antisense technology (where a nucleic acid molecule simply binds to a nucleic acid target to block its translation) since the concentration of ribozyme necessary to affect a therapeutic treatment is lower than that of an antisense oligonucleotide. This advantage reflects the ability of the ribozyme to act enzymatically. Thus, a single ribozyme molecule is able to cleave many molecules of target RNA. In addition, the ribozyme is a highly specific inhibitor, with the specificity of inhibition depending not only on the base pairing mechanism of binding to the target RNA, but also on the mechanism of target RNA cleavage. Single mismatches, or base-substitutions, near the site of cleavage can completely eliminate catalytic activity of a ribozyme. Similar mismatches in antisense molecules do not prevent their action (Woolf et al., 1992). Thus, the specificity of action of a ribozyme is greater than that of an antisense oligonucleotide binding the same RNA site.

The enzymatic nucleic acid molecule may be formed in a hammerhead, hairpin, a hepatitis δ virus, group I intron or RNaseP RNA (in association with an RNA guide sequence) or Neurospora VS RNA motif. Examples of hammerhead motifs are described by Rossi et al. (1992). Examples of hairpin motifs are described by Hampel et al. (Eur. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. EP 0360257), Hampel and Tritz (1989), Hampel et al. (1990) and U.S. Pat. No. 5,631,359 (specifically incorporated herein by reference). An example of the hepatitis δ virus motif is described by Perrotta and Been (1992); an example of the RNaseP motif is described by Guerrier-Takada et al. (1983); Neurospora VS RNA ribozyme motif is described by Collins (Saville and Collins, 1990; Saville and Collins, 1991; Collins and Olive, 1993); and an example of the Group I intron is described in (U.S. Pat. No. 4,987,071, specifically incorporated herein by reference). All that is important in an enzymatic nucleic acid molecule of this invention is that it has a specific substrate binding site which is complementary to one or more of the target gene RNA regions, and that it have nucleotide sequences within or surrounding that substrate binding site which impart an RNA cleaving activity to the molecule. Thus the ribozyme constructs need not be limited to specific motifs mentioned herein.

In certain embodiments, it may be important to produce enzymatic cleaving agents which exhibit a high degree of specificity for the RNA of a desired target, such as one of the sequences disclosed herein. The enzymatic nucleic acid molecule is preferably targeted to a highly conserved sequence region of a target mRNA. Such enzymatic nucleic acid molecules can be delivered exogenously to specific cells as required. Alternatively, the ribozymes can be expressed from DNA or RNA vectors that are delivered to specific cells.

Small enzymatic nucleic acid motifs (e.g., of the hammerhead or the hairpin structure) may also be used for exogenous delivery. The simple structure of these molecules increases the ability of the enzymatic nucleic acid to invade targeted regions of the mRNA structure. Alternatively, catalytic RNA molecules can be expressed within cells from eukaryotic promoters (e.g., Scanlon et al., 1991; Kashani-Sabet et al., 1992; Dropulic et al., 1992; Weerasinghe et al., 1991; Ojwang et al., 1992; Chen et al., 1992; Sarver et al., 1990). Those skilled in the art realize that any ribozyme can be expressed in eukaryotic cells from the appropriate DNA vector. The activity of such ribozymes can be augmented by their release from the primary transcript by a second ribozyme (Int. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 93/23569, and Int. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 94/02595, both hereby incorporated by reference; Ohkawa et al., 1992; Taira et al., 1991; and Ventura et al., 1993).

Ribozymes may be added directly, or can be complexed with cationic lipids, lipid complexes, packaged within liposomes, or otherwise delivered to target cells. The RNA or RNA complexes can be locally administered to relevant tissues ex vivo, or in vivo through injection, aerosol inhalation, infusion pump or stent, with or without their incorporation in biopolymers.

Ribozymes may be designed as described in Int. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 93/23569 and Int. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 94/02595, each specifically incorporated herein by reference) and synthesized to be tested in vitro and in vivo, as described. Such ribozymes can also be optimized for delivery. While specific examples are provided, those in the art will recognize that equivalent RNA targets in other species can be utilized when necessary.

Hammerhead or hairpin ribozymes may be individually analyzed by computer folding (Jaeger et al., 1989) to assess whether the ribozyme sequences fold into the appropriate secondary structure. Those ribozymes with unfavorable intramolecular interactions between the binding arms and the catalytic core are eliminated from consideration. Varying binding arm lengths can be chosen to optimize activity. Generally, at least 5 or so bases on each arm are able to bind to, or otherwise interact with, the target RNA.

Ribozymes of the hammerhead or hairpin motif may be designed to anneal to various sites in the mRNA message, and can be chemically synthesized. The method of synthesis used follows the procedure for normal RNA synthesis as described in Usman et al. (1987) and in Scaringe et al. (1990) and makes use of common nucleic acid protecting and coupling groups, such as dimethoxytrityl at the 5′-end, and phosphoramidites at the 3′-end. Average stepwise coupling yields are typically >98%. Hairpin ribozymes may be synthesized in two parts and annealed to reconstruct an active ribozyme (Chowrira and Burke, 1992). Ribozymes may be modified extensively to enhance stability by modification with nuclease resistant groups, for example, 2′-amino, 2′-C-allyl, 2′-fluoro, 2′-o-methyl, 2′-H (for a review see e.g., Usman and Cedergren, 1992). Ribozymes may be purified by gel electrophoresis using general methods or by high pressure liquid chromatography and resuspended in water.

Ribozyme activity can be optimized by altering the length of the ribozyme binding arms, or chemically synthesizing ribozymes with modifications that prevent their degradation by serum ribonucleases (see e.g., Int. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 92/07065; Perrault et al, 1990; Pieken et al., 1991; Usman and Cedergren, 1992, Int. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 93/15187; Int. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 91/03162; Eur. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. 92110298.4; U.S. Pat. No. 5,334,711; and Int. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 94/13688, which describe various chemical modifications that can be made to the sugar moieties of enzymatic RNA molecules), modifications which enhance their efficacy in cells, and removal of stem II bases to shorten RNA synthesis times and reduce chemical requirements.

Sullivan et al. (Int. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 94/02595) describes the general methods for delivery of enzymatic RNA molecules. Ribozymes may be administered to cells by a variety of methods known to those familiar to the art, including, but not restricted to, encapsulation in liposomes, by iontophoresis, or by incorporation into other vehicles, such as hydrogels, cyclodextrins, biodegradable nanocapsules, and bioadhesive microspheres. For some indications, ribozymes may be directly delivered ex vivo to cells or tissues with or without the aforementioned vehicles. Alternatively, the RNA/vehicle combination may be locally delivered by direct inhalation, by direct injection or by use of a catheter, infusion pump or stent. Other routes of delivery include, but are not limited to, intravascular, intramuscular, subcutaneous or joint injection, aerosol inhalation, oral (tablet or pill form), topical, systemic, ocular, intraperitoneal and/or intrathecal delivery. More detailed descriptions of ribozyme delivery and administration are provided in Int. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 94/02595 and Int. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 93/23569, each specifically incorporated herein by reference.

Another means of accumulating high concentrations of a ribozyme(s) within cells is to incorporate the ribozyme-encoding sequences into a DNA expression vector. Transcription of the ribozyme sequences are driven from a promoter for eukaryotic RNA polymerase I (pol I), RNA polymerase II (pol II), or RNA polymerase III (pol III). Transcripts from pol II or pol III promoters will be expressed at high levels in all cells; the levels of a given pol II promoter in a given cell type will depend on the nature of the gene regulatory sequences (enhancers, silencers, etc.) present nearby. Prokaryotic RNA polymerase promoters may also be used, providing that the prokaryotic RNA polymerase enzyme is expressed in the appropriate cells (Elroy-Stein and Moss, 1990; Gao and Huang, 1993; Lieber et al., 1993; Zhou et al., 1990). Ribozymes expressed from such promoters can function in mammalian cells (e.g. Kashani-Saber et al., 1992; Ojwang et al., 1992; Chen et al., 1992; Yu et al., 1993; L'Huillier et al., 1992; Lisziewicz et al., 1993). Such transcription units can be incorporated into a variety of vectors for introduction into mammalian cells, including but not restricted to, plasmid DNA vectors, viral DNA vectors (such as adenovirus or adeno-associated vectors), or viral RNA vectors (such as retroviral, semliki forest virus, sindbis virus vectors).

Ribozymes may be used as diagnostic tools to examine genetic drift and mutations within diseased cells. They can also be used to assess levels of the target RNA molecule. The close relationship between ribozyme activity and the structure of the target RNA allows the detection of mutations in any region of the molecule which alters the base-pairing and three-dimensional structure of the target RNA. By using multiple ribozymes, one may map nucleotide changes which are important to RNA structure and function in vitro, as well as in cells and tissues. Cleavage of target RNAs with ribozymes may be used to inhibit gene expression and define the role (essentially) of specified gene products in the progression of disease. In this manner, other genetic targets may be defined as important mediators of the disease. These studies will lead to better treatment of the disease progression by affording the possibility of combinational therapies (e.g., multiple ribozymes targeted to different genes, ribozymes coupled with known small molecule inhibitors, or intermittent treatment with combinations of ribozymes and/or other chemical or biological molecules). Other in vitro uses of ribozymes are well known in the art, and include detection of the presence of mRNA associated with an IL-5 related condition. Such RNA is detected by determining the presence of a cleavage product after treatment with a ribozyme using standard methodology.

Peptide Nucleic Acids

In certain embodiments, the inventors contemplate the use of peptide nucleic acids (PNAs) in the practice of the methods of the invention. PNA is a DNA mimic in which the nucleobases are attached to a pseudopeptide backbone (Good and Nielsen, 1997). PNA is able to be utilized in a number methods that traditionally have used RNA or DNA. Often PNA sequences perform better in techniques than the corresponding RNA or DNA sequences and have utilities that are not inherent to RNA or DNA. A review of PNA including methods of making, characteristics of, and methods of using, is provided by Corey (1997) and is incorporated herein by reference. As such, in certain embodiments, one may prepare PNA sequences that are complementary to one or more portions of the ACE mRNA sequence, and such PNA compositions may be used to regulate, alter, decrease, or reduce the translation of ACE-specific mRNA, and thereby alter the level of ACE activity in a host cell to which such PNA compositions have been administered.

PNAs have 2-aminoethyl-glycine linkages replacing the normal phosphodiester backbone of DNA (Nielsen et al., 1991; Hanvey et al., 1992; Hyrup and Nielsen, 1996; Neilsen, 1996). This chemistry has three important consequences: firstly, in contrast to DNA or phosphorothioate oligonucleotides, PNAs are neutral molecules; secondly, PNAs are achiral, which avoids the need to develop a stereoselective synthesis; and thirdly, PNA synthesis uses standard Boc (Dueholm et al., 1994) or Fmoc (Thomson et al., 1995) protocols for solid-phase peptide synthesis, although other methods, including a modified Merrifield method, have been used (Christensen et al., 1995).

PNA monomers or ready-made oligomers are commercially available from PerSeptive Biosystems (Framingham, Mass.). PNA syntheses by either Boc or Fmoc protocols are straightforward using manual or automated protocols (Norton et al., 1995). The manual protocol lends itself to the production of chemically modified PNAs or the simultaneous synthesis of families of closely related PNAs.

As with peptide synthesis, the success of a particular PNA synthesis will depend on the properties of the chosen sequence. For example, while in theory PNAs can incorporate any combination of nucleotide bases, the presence of adjacent purines can lead to deletions of one or more residues in the product. In expectation of this difficulty, it is suggested that, in producing PNAs with adjacent purines, one should repeat the coupling of residues likely to be added inefficiently. This should be followed by the purification of PNAs by reverse-phase high-pressure liquid chromatography (Norton et al., 1995) providing yields and purity of product similar to those observed during the synthesis of peptides.

Modifications of PNAs for a given application may be accomplished by coupling amino acids during solid-phase synthesis or by attaching compounds that contain a carboxylic acid group to the exposed N-terminal amine. Alternatively, PNAs can be modified after synthesis by coupling to an introduced lysine or cysteine. The ease with which PNAs can be modified facilitates optimization for better solubility or for specific functional requirements. Once synthesized, the identity of PNAs and their derivatives can be confirmed by mass spectrometry. Several studies have made and utilized modifications of PNAs (Norton et al., 1995; Haaima et al., 1996; Stetsenko et al., 1996; Petersen et al., 1995; Ulmann et al., 1996; Koch et al., 1995; Orum et al., 1995; Footer et al., 1996; Griffith et al., 1995; Kremsky et al., 1996; Pardridge et al., 1995; Boffa et al., 1995; Landsdorp et al., 1996; Gambacorti-Passerini et al., 1996; Armitage et al., 1997; Seeger et al., 1997; Ruskowski et al., 1997). U.S. Pat. No. 5,700,922 discusses PNA-DNA-PNA chimeric molecules and their uses in diagnostics, modulating protein in organisms, and treatment of conditions susceptible to therapeutics.

In contrast to DNA and RNA, which contain negatively charged linkages, the PNA backbone is neutral. In spite of this dramatic alteration, PNAs recognize complementary DNA and RNA by Watson-Crick pairing (Egholm et al., 1993), validating the initial modeling by Nielsen et al. (1991). PNAs lack 3′ to 5′ polarity and can bind in either parallel or antiparallel fashion, with the antiparallel, mode being preferred (Egholm et al., 1993).

Hybridization of DNA oligonucleotides to DNA and RNA is destabilized by electrostatic repulsion between the negatively charged phosphate backbones of the complementary strands. By contrast, the absence of charge repulsion in PNA-DNA or PNA-RNA duplexes increases the melting temperature (T_(m)) and reduces the dependence of T_(m) on the concentration of mono- or divalent cations (Nielsen et al., 1991). The enhanced rate and affinity of hybridization are significant because they are responsible for the surprising ability of PNAs to perform strand invasion of complementary sequences within relaxed double-stranded DNA. In addition, the efficient hybridization at inverted repeats suggests that PNAs can recognize secondary structure effectively within double-stranded DNA. Enhanced recognition also occurs with PNAs immobilized on surfaces, and Wang et al. have shown that support-bound PNAs can be used to detect hybridization events (Wang et al., 1996).

One might expect that tight binding of PNAs to complementary sequences would also increase binding to similar (but not identical) sequences, reducing the sequence specificity of PNA recognition. As with DNA hybridization, however, selective recognition can be achieved by balancing oligomer length and incubation temperature. Moreover, selective hybridization of PNAs is encouraged by PNA-DNA hybridization being less tolerant of base mismatches than DNA-DNA hybridization. For example, a single mismatch within a 16 bp PNA-DNA duplex can reduce the T_(m) by up to 15° C. (Egholm et al., 1993). This high level of discrimination has allowed the development of several PNA-based strategies for the analysis of point mutations (Wang et al., 1996; Carlsson et al., 1996; Thiede et al., 1996; Webb and Hurskainen, 1996; Perry-O'Keefe et al., 1996).

High-affinity binding provides clear advantages for molecular recognition and the development of new applications for PNAs. For example, 11-13 nucleotide PNAs inhibit the activity of telomerase, a ribonucleo-protein that extends telomere ends using an essential RNA template, while the analogous DNA oligomers do not (Norton et al., 1996).

Neutral PNAs are more hydrophobic than analogous DNA oligomers, and this can lead to difficulty solubilizing them at neutral pH, especially if the PNAs have a high purine content or if they have the potential to form secondary structures. Their solubility can be enhanced by attaching one or more positive charges to the PNA termini (Nielsen et al., 1991).

Findings by Allfrey and colleagues suggest that strand invasion will occur spontaneously at sequences within chromosomal DNA (Boffa et al., 1995; Boffa et al., 1996). These studies targeted PNAs to triplet repeats of the nucleotides CAG and used this recognition to purify transcriptionally active DNA (Boffa et al., 1995) and to inhibit transcription (Boffa et al., 1996). This result suggests that if PNAs can be delivered within cells then they will have the potential to be general sequence-specific regulators of gene expression. Studies and reviews concerning the use of PNAs as antisense and anti-gene agents include Nielsen et al. (1993b), Hanvey et al. (1992), and Good and Nielsen (1997). Koppelhus et al. (1997) have used PNAs to inhibit HIV-1 inverse transcription, showing that PNAs may be used for antiviral therapies.

Methods of characterizing the antisense binding properties of PNAs are discussed in Rose (1993) and Jensen et al. (1997). Rose uses capillary gel electrophoresis to determine binding of PNAs to their complementary oligonucleotide, measuring the relative binding kinetics and stoichiometry. Similar types of measurements were made by Jensen et al. using BIAcore™ technology.

Other applications of PNAs include use in DNA strand invasion (Nielsen et al., 1991), antisense inhibition (Hanvey et al., 1992), mutational analysis (Orum et al., 1993), enhancers of transcription (Mollegaard et al., 1994), nucleic acid purification (Orum et al., 1995), isolation of transcriptionally active genes (Boffa et al., 1995), blocking of transcription factor binding (Vickers et al., 1995), genome cleavage (Veselkov et al., 1996), biosensors (Wang et al., 1996), in situ hybridization (Thisted et al., 1996), and in a alternative to Southern blotting (Perry-O'Keefe, 1996).

Polypeptide Compositions

The present invention, in other aspects, provides polypeptide compositions. Generally, a polypeptide of the invention will be an isolated polypeptide (or an epitope, variant, or active fragment thereof) derived from a mammalian species. Preferably, the polypeptide is encoded by a polynucleotide sequence disclosed herein or a sequence which hybridizes under moderately stringent conditions to a polynucleotide sequence disclosed herein. Alternatively, the polypeptide may be defined as a polypeptide which comprises a contiguous amino acid sequence from an amino acid sequence disclosed herein, or which polypeptide comprises an entire amino acid sequence disclosed herein.

In the present invention, a polypeptide composition is also understood to comprise one or more polypeptides that are immunologically reactive with antibodies generated against a polypeptide of the invention, particularly a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence disclosed in SEQ ID NO: 112-114, 172, 176, 178, 327, 329, 331, 336, 339, 376-380, 383, 477-483, 496, 504, 505, 519, 520, 522, 525, 527, 532, 534, 537-551, 553-568, 573-586, 588-590, 592, 706-708, 775, 776, 778 and 780, or active fragments, variants or biological functional equivalents thereof.

Likewise, a polypeptide composition of the present invention is understood to comprise one or more polypeptides that are capable of eliciting antibodies that are immunologically reactive with one or more polypeptides encoded by one or more contiguous nucleic acid sequences contained in SEQ ID NO: 1-111, 115-171, 173-175, 177, 179-305, 307-315, 326, 328, 330, 332-335, 340-375, 381, 382 and 384-476, 524, 526, 530, 531, 533, 535, 536, 552, 569-572, 587, 591, 593-606, 618-705, 709-774, 777 and 789, or to active fragments, or to variants thereof, or to one or more nucleic acid sequences which hybridize to one or more of these sequences under conditions of moderate to high stringency. Particularly illustrative polypeptides include the amino acid sequence disclosed in SEQ ID NO: 112-114, 172, 176, 178, 327, 329, 331, 336, 339, 376-380, 383, 477-483, 496, 504, 505, 519, 520, 522, 525, 527, 532, 534, 537-551, 553-568, 573-586, 588-590, 592, 706-708, 775, 776, 778 and 780.

As used herein, an active fragment of a polypeptide includes a whole or a portion of a polypeptide which is modified by conventional techniques, e.g., mutagenesis, or by addition, deletion, or substitution, but which active fragment exhibits substantially the same structure function, antigenicity, etc., as a polypeptide as described herein.

In certain illustrative embodiments, the polypeptides of the invention will comprise at least an immunogenic portion of a prostate-specific protein or a variant thereof, as described herein. As noted above, a “prostate-specific protein” is a protein that is expressed by prostate cells. Proteins that are prostate-specific proteins also react detectably within an immunoassay (such as an ELISA) with antisera from a patient with prostate cancer. Polypeptides as described herein may be of any length. Additional sequences derived from the native protein and/or heterologous sequences may be present, and such sequences may (but need not) possess further immunogenic or antigenic properties.

An “immunogenic portion,” as used herein is a portion of a protein that is recognized (i.e., specifically bound) by a B-cell and/or T-cell surface antigen receptor. Such immunogenic portions generally comprise at least 5 amino acid residues, more preferably at least 10, and still more preferably at least 20 amino acid residues of a prostate-specific protein or a variant thereof. Certain preferred immunogenic portions include peptides in which an N-terminal leader sequence and/or transmembrane domain have been deleted. Other preferred immunogenic portions may contain a small N- and/or C-terminal deletion (e.g., 1-30 amino acids, preferably 5-15 amino acids), relative to the mature protein.

Immunogenic portions may generally be identified using well known techniques, such as those summarized in Paul, Fundamental Immunology, 3rd ed., 243-247 (Raven Press, 1993) and references cited therein. Such techniques include screening polypeptides for the ability to react with antigen-specific antibodies, antisera and/or T-cell lines or clones. As used herein, antisera and antibodies are “antigen-specific” if they specifically bind to an antigen (i.e., they react with the protein in an ELISA or other immunoassay, and do not react detectably with unrelated proteins). Such antisera and antibodies may be prepared as described herein, and using well known techniques. An immunogenic portion of a native prostate-specific protein is a portion that reacts with such antisera and/or T-cells at a level that is not substantially less than the reactivity of the full length polypeptide (e.g., in an ELISA and/or T-cell reactivity assay). Such immunogenic portions may react within such assays at a level that is similar to or greater than the reactivity of the full length polypeptide. Such screens may generally be performed using methods well known to those of ordinary skill in the art, such as those described in Harlow and Lane, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, 1988. For example, a polypeptide may be immobilized on a solid support and contacted with patient sera to allow binding of antibodies within the sera to the immobilized polypeptide. Unbound sera may then be removed and bound antibodies detected using, for example, ¹²⁵I-labeled Protein A.

As noted above, a composition may comprise a variant of a native prostate-specific protein. A polypeptide “variant,” as used herein, is a polypeptide that differs from a native prostate-specific protein in one or more substitutions, deletions, additions and/or insertions, such that the immunogenicity of the polypeptide is not substantially diminished. In other words, the ability of a variant to react with antigen-specific antisera may be enhanced or unchanged, relative to the native protein, or may be diminished by less than 50%, and preferably less than 20%, relative to the native protein. Such variants may generally be identified by modifying one of the above polypeptide sequences and evaluating the reactivity of the modified polypeptide with antigen-specific antibodies or antisera as described herein. Preferred variants include those in which one or more portions, such as an N-terminal leader sequence or transmembrane domain, have been removed. Other preferred variants include variants in which a small portion (e.g., 1-30 amino acids, preferably 5-15 amino acids) has been removed from the N- and/or C-terminal of the mature protein.

Polypeptide variants encompassed by the present invention include those exhibiting at least about 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, or 99% or more identity (determined as described above) to the polypeptides disclosed herein.

Preferably, a variant contains conservative substitutions. A “conservative substitution” is one in which an amino acid is substituted for another amino acid that has similar properties, such that one skilled in the art of peptide chemistry would expect the secondary structure and hydropathic nature of the polypeptide to be substantially unchanged. Amino acid substitutions may generally be made on the basis of similarity in polarity, charge, solubility, hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity and/or the amphipathic nature of the residues. For example, negatively charged amino acids include aspartic acid and glutamic acid; positively charged amino acids include lysine and arginine; and amino acids with uncharged polar head groups having similar hydrophilicity values include leucine, isoleucine and valine; glycine and alanine; asparagine and glutamine; and serine, threonine, phenylalanine and tyrosine. Other groups of amino acids that may represent conservative changes include: (1) ala, pro, gly, glu, asp, gln, asn, ser, thr; (2) cys, ser, tyr, thr; (3) val, ile, leu, met, ala, phe; (4) lys, arg, his; and (5) phe, tyr, trp, his. A variant may also, or alternatively, contain nonconservative changes. In a preferred embodiment, variant polypeptides differ from a native sequence by substitution, deletion or addition of five amino acids or fewer. Variants may also (or alternatively) be modified by, for example, the deletion or addition of amino acids that have minimal influence on the immunogenicity, secondary structure and hydropathic nature of the polypeptide.

As noted above, polypeptides may comprise a signal (or leader) sequence at the N-terminal end of the protein, which co-translationally or post-translationally directs transfer of the protein. The polypeptide may also be conjugated to a linker or other sequence for ease of synthesis, purification or identification of the polypeptide (e.g., poly-His), or to enhance binding of the polypeptide to a solid support. For example, a polypeptide may be conjugated to an immunoglobulin Fc region.

Polypeptides may be prepared using any of a variety of well known techniques. Recombinant polypeptides encoded by DNA sequences as described above may be readily prepared from the DNA sequences using any of a variety of expression vectors known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Expression may be achieved in any appropriate host cell that has been transformed or transfected with an expression vector containing a DNA molecule that encodes a recombinant polypeptide. Suitable host cells include prokaryotes, yeast, and higher eukaryotic cells, such as mammalian cells and plant cells. Preferably, the host cells employed are E. coli, yeast or a mammalian cell line such as COS or CHO. Supernatants from suitable host/vector systems which secrete recombinant protein or polypeptide into culture media may be first concentrated using a commercially available filter. Following concentration, the concentrate may be applied to a suitable purification matrix such as an affinity matrix or an ion exchange resin. Finally, one or more reverse phase HPLC steps can be employed to further purify a recombinant polypeptide.

Portions and other variants having less than about 100 amino acids, and generally less than about 50 amino acids, may also be generated by synthetic means, using techniques well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. For example, such polypeptides may be synthesized using any of the commercially available solid-phase techniques, such as the Merrifield solid-phase synthesis method, where amino acids are sequentially added to a growing amino acid chain. See Merrifield, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85:2149-2146, 1963. Equipment for automated synthesis of polypeptides is commercially available from suppliers such as Perkin Elmer/Applied BioSystems Division (Foster City, Calif.), and may be operated according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Within certain specific embodiments, a polypeptide may be a fusion protein that comprises multiple polypeptides as described herein, or that comprises at least one polypeptide as described herein and an unrelated sequence, such as a known tumor protein. A fusion partner may, for example, assist in providing T helper epitopes (an immunological fusion partner), preferably T helper epitopes recognized by humans, or may assist in expressing the protein (an expression enhancer) at higher yields than the native recombinant protein. Certain preferred fusion partners are both immunological and expression enhancing fusion partners. Other fusion partners may be selected so as to increase the solubility of the protein or to enable the protein to be targeted to desired intracellular compartments. Still further fusion partners include affinity tags, which facilitate purification of the protein.

Fusion proteins may generally be prepared using standard techniques, including chemical conjugation. Preferably, a fusion protein is expressed as a recombinant protein, allowing the production of increased levels, relative to a non-fused protein, in an expression system. Briefly, DNA sequences encoding the polypeptide components may be assembled separately, and ligated into an appropriate expression vector. The 3′ end of the DNA sequence encoding one polypeptide component is ligated, with or without a peptide linker, to the 5′ end of a DNA sequence encoding the second polypeptide component so that the reading frames of the sequences are in phase. This permits translation into a single fusion protein that retains the biological activity of both component polypeptides.

A peptide linker sequence may be employed to separate the first and second polypeptide components by a distance sufficient to ensure that each polypeptide folds into its secondary and tertiary structures. Such a peptide linker sequence is incorporated into the fusion protein using standard techniques well known in the art. Suitable peptide linker sequences may be chosen based on the following factors: (1) their ability to adopt a flexible extended conformation; (2) their inability to adopt a secondary structure that could interact with functional epitopes on the first and second polypeptides; and (3) the lack of hydrophobic or charged residues that might react with the polypeptide functional epitopes. Preferred peptide linker sequences contain Gly, Asn and Ser residues. Other near neutral amino acids, such as Thr and Ala may also be used in the linker sequence. Amino acid sequences which may be usefully employed as linkers include those disclosed in Maratea et al., Gene 40:39-46, 1985; Murphy et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 83:8258-8262, 1986; U.S. Pat. No. 4,935,233 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,751,180. The linker sequence may generally be from 1 to about 50 amino acids in length. Linker sequences are not required when the first and second polypeptides have non-essential N-terminal amino acid regions that can be used to separate the functional domains and prevent steric interference.

The ligated DNA sequences are operably linked to suitable transcriptional or translational regulatory elements. The regulatory elements responsible for expression of DNA are located only 5′ to the DNA sequence encoding the first polypeptides. Similarly, stop codons required to end translation and transcription termination signals are only present 3′ to the DNA sequence encoding the second polypeptide.

Fusion proteins are also provided. Such proteins comprise a polypeptide as described herein together with an unrelated immunogenic protein. Preferably the immunogenic protein is capable of eliciting a recall response. Examples of such proteins include tetanus, tuberculosis and hepatitis proteins (see, for example, Stoute et al. New Engl. J. Med., 336:86-91, 1997).

Within preferred embodiments, an immunological fusion partner is derived from protein D, a surface protein of the gram-negative bacterium Haemophilus influenza B (WO 91/18926). Preferably, a protein D derivative comprises approximately the first third of the protein (e.g., the first N-terminal 100-110 amino acids), and a protein D derivative may be lipidated. Within certain preferred embodiments, the first 109 residues of a Lipoprotein D fusion partner is included on the N-terminus to provide the polypeptide with additional exogenous T-cell epitopes and to increase the expression level in E. coli (thus functioning as an expression enhancer). The lipid tail ensures optimal presentation of the antigen to antigen presenting cells. Other fusion partners include the non-structural protein from influenzae virus, NS1 (hemaglutinin). Typically, the N-terminal 81 amino acids are used, although different fragments that include T-helper epitopes may be used.

In another embodiment, the immunological fusion partner is the protein known as LYTA, or a portion thereof (preferably a C-terminal portion). LYTA is derived from Streptococcus pneumoniae, which synthesizes an N-acetyl-L-alanine amidase known as amidase LYTA (encoded by the LytA gene; Gene 43:265-292, 1986). LYTA is an autolysin that specifically degrades certain bonds in the peptidoglycan backbone. The C-terminal domain of the LYTA protein is responsible for the affinity to the choline or to some choline analogues such as DEAE. This property has been exploited for the development of E. coli C-LYTA expressing plasmids useful for expression of fusion proteins. Purification of hybrid proteins containing the C-LYTA fragment at the amino terminus has been described (see Biotechnology 10:795-798, 1992). Within a preferred embodiment, a repeat portion of LYTA may be incorporated into a fusion protein. A repeat portion is found in the C-terminal region starting at residue 178. A particularly preferred repeat portion incorporates residues 188-305.

In general, polypeptides (including fusion proteins) and polynucleotides as described herein are isolated. An “isolated” polypeptide or polynucleotide is one that is removed from its original environment. For example, a naturally-occurring protein is isolated if it is separated from some or all of the coexisting materials in the natural system. Preferably, such polypeptides are at least about 90% pure, more preferably at least about 95% pure and most preferably at least about 99% pure. A polynucleotide is considered to be isolated if, for example, it is cloned into a vector that is not a part of the natural environment.

Binding Agents

The present invention further provides agents, such as antibodies and antigen-binding fragments thereof, that specifically bind to a prostate-specific protein. As used herein, an antibody, or antigen-binding fragment thereof, is said to “specifically bind” to a prostate-specific protein if it reacts at a detectable level (within, for example, an ELISA) with a prostate-specific protein, and does not react detectably with unrelated proteins under similar conditions. As used herein, “binding” refers to a noncovalent association between two separate molecules such that a complex is formed. The ability to bind may be evaluated by, for example, determining a binding constant for the formation of the complex. The binding constant is the value obtained when the concentration of the complex is divided by the product of the component concentrations. In general, two compounds are said to “bind,” in the context of the present invention, when the binding constant for complex formation exceeds about 10³ L/mol. The binding constant may be determined using methods well known in the art.

Binding agents may be further capable of differentiating between patients with and without a cancer, such as prostate cancer, using the representative assays provided herein. In other words, antibodies or other binding agents that bind to a prostate-specific protein will generate a signal indicating the presence of a cancer in at least about 20% of patients with the disease, and will generate a negative signal indicating the absence of the disease in at least about 90% of individuals without the cancer. To determine whether a binding agent satisfies this requirement, biological samples (e.g., blood, sera, sputum, urine and/or tumor biopsies) from patients with and without a cancer (as determined using standard clinical tests) may be assayed as described herein for the presence of polypeptides that bind to the binding agent. It will be apparent that a statistically significant number of samples with and without the disease should be assayed. Each binding agent should satisfy the above criteria; however, those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that binding agents may be used in combination to improve sensitivity.

Any agent that satisfies the above requirements may be a binding agent. For example, a binding agent may be a ribosome, with or without a peptide component, an RNA molecule or a polypeptide. In a preferred embodiment, a binding agent is an antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof. Antibodies may be prepared by any of a variety of techniques known to those of ordinary skill in the art. See, e.g., Harlow and Lane, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, 1988. In general, antibodies can be produced by cell culture techniques, including the generation of monoclonal antibodies as described herein, or via transfection of antibody genes into suitable bacterial or mammalian cell hosts, in order to allow for the production of recombinant antibodies. In one technique, an immunogen comprising the polypeptide is initially injected into any of a wide variety of mammals (e.g., mice, rats, rabbits, sheep or goats). In this step, the polypeptides of this invention may serve as the immunogen without modification. Alternatively, particularly for relatively short polypeptides, a superior immune response may be elicited if the polypeptide is joined to a carrier protein, such as bovine serum albumin or keyhole limpet hemocyanin. The immunogen is injected into the animal host, preferably according to a predetermined schedule incorporating one or more booster immunizations, and the animals are bled periodically. Polyclonal antibodies specific for the polypeptide may then be purified from such antisera by, for example, affinity chromatography using the polypeptide coupled to a suitable solid support.

Monoclonal antibodies specific for an antigenic polypeptide of interest may be prepared, for example, using the technique of Kohler and Milstein, Eur. J. Immunol. 6:511-519, 1976, and improvements thereto. Briefly, these methods involve the preparation of immortal cell lines capable of producing antibodies having the desired specificity (i.e., reactivity with the polypeptide of interest). Such cell lines may be produced, for example, from spleen cells obtained from an animal immunized as described above. The spleen cells are then immortalized by, for example, fusion with a myeloma cell fusion partner, preferably one that is syngeneic with the immunized animal. A variety of fusion techniques may be employed. For example, the spleen cells and myeloma cells may be combined with a nonionic detergent for a few minutes and then plated at low density on a selective medium that supports the growth of hybrid cells, but not myeloma cells. A preferred selection technique uses HAT (hypoxanthine, aminopterin, thymidine) selection. After a sufficient time, usually about 1 to 2 weeks, colonies of hybrids are observed. Single colonies are selected and their culture supernatants tested for binding activity against the polypeptide. Hybridomas having high reactivity and specificity are preferred.

Monoclonal antibodies may be isolated from the supernatants of growing hybridoma colonies. In addition, various techniques may be employed to enhance the yield, such as injection of the hybridoma cell line into the peritoneal cavity of a suitable vertebrate host, such as a mouse. Monoclonal antibodies may then be harvested from the ascites fluid or the blood. Contaminants may be removed from the antibodies by conventional techniques, such as chromatography, gel filtration, precipitation, and extraction. The polypeptides of this invention may be used in the purification process in, for example, an affinity chromatography step.

Within certain embodiments, the use of antigen-binding fragments of antibodies may be preferred. Such fragments include Fab fragments, which may be prepared using standard techniques. Briefly, immunoglobulins may be purified from rabbit serum by affinity chromatography on Protein A bead columns (Harlow and Lane, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, 1988) and digested by papain to yield Fab and Fc fragments. The Fab and Fc fragments may be separated by affinity chromatography on protein A bead columns.

Monoclonal antibodies of the present invention may be coupled to one or more therapeutic agents. Suitable agents in this regard include radionuclides, differentiation inducers, drugs, toxins, and derivatives thereof. Preferred radionuclides include ⁹⁰Y, ¹²³I, ¹²⁵I, ¹³¹I, ¹⁸⁶Re, ¹⁸⁸Re, ²¹¹At, and ²¹²Bi. Preferred drugs include methotrexate, and pyrimidine and purine analogs. Preferred differentiation inducers include phorbol esters and butyric acid. Preferred toxins include ricin, abrin, diptheria toxin, cholera toxin, gelonin, Pseudomonas exotoxin, Shigella toxin, and pokeweed antiviral protein.

A therapeutic agent may be coupled (e.g., covalently bonded) to a suitable monoclonal antibody either directly or indirectly (e.g., via a linker group). A direct reaction between an agent and an antibody is possible when each possesses a substituent capable of reacting with the other. For example, a nucleophilic group, such as an amino or sulflhydryl group, on one may be capable of reacting with a carbonyl-containing group, such as an anhydride or an acid halide, or with an alkyl group containing a good leaving group (e.g., a halide) on the other.

Alternatively, it may be desirable to couple a therapeutic agent and an antibody via a linker group. A linker group can function as a spacer to distance an antibody from an agent in order to avoid interference with binding capabilities. A linker group can also serve to increase the chemical reactivity of a substituent on an agent or an antibody, and thus increase the coupling efficiency. An increase in chemical reactivity may also facilitate the use of agents, or functional groups on agents, which otherwise would not be possible.

It will be evident to those skilled in the art that a variety of bifunctional or polyfunctional reagents, both homo- and hetero-functional (such as those described in the catalog of the Pierce Chemical Co., Rockford, Ill.), may be employed as the linker group. Coupling may be effected, for example, through amino groups, carboxyl groups, sulfhydryl groups or oxidized carbohydrate residues. There are numerous references describing such methodology, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,671,958, to Rodwell et al.

Where a therapeutic agent is more potent when free from the antibody portion of the immunoconjugates of the present invention, it may be desirable to use a linker group which is cleavable during or upon internalization into a cell. A number of different cleavable linker groups have been described. The mechanisms for the intracellular release of an agent from these linker groups include cleavage by reduction of a disulfide bond (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,489,710, to Spitler), by irradiation of a photolabile bond (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,625,014, to Senter et al.), by hydrolysis of derivatized amino acid side chains (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,638,045, to Kohn et al.), by serum complement-mediated hydrolysis (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,671,958, to Rodwell et al.), and acid-catalyzed hydrolysis (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,569,789, to Blattler et al.).

It may be desirable to couple more than one agent to an antibody. In one embodiment, multiple molecules of an agent are coupled to one antibody molecule. In another embodiment, more than one type of agent may be coupled to one antibody. Regardless of the particular embodiment, immunoconjugates with more than one agent may be prepared in a variety of ways. For example, more than one agent may be coupled directly to an antibody molecule, or linkers that provide multiple sites for attachment can be used. Alternatively, a carrier can be used.

A carrier may bear the agents in a variety of ways, including covalent bonding either directly or via a linker group. Suitable carriers include proteins such as albumins (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,507,234, to Kato et al.), peptides and polysaccharides such as aminodextran (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,699,784, to Shih et al.). A carrier may also bear an agent by noncovalent bonding or by encapsulation, such as within a liposome vesicle (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,429,008 and 4,873,088). Carriers specific for radionuclide agents include radiohalogenated small molecules and chelating compounds. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 4,735,792 discloses representative radiohalogenated small molecules and their synthesis. A radionuclide chelate may be formed from chelating compounds that include those containing nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the donor atoms for binding the metal, or metal oxide, radionuclide. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 4,673,562, to Davison et al. discloses representative chelating compounds and their synthesis.

A variety of routes of administration for the antibodies and immunoconjugates may be used. Typically, administration will be intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous or in the bed of a resected tumor. It will be evident that the precise dose of the antibody/immunoconjugate will vary depending upon the antibody used, the antigen density on the tumor, and the rate of clearance of the antibody.

T Cells

Immunotherapeutic compositions may also, or alternatively, comprise T cells specific for a prostate-specific protein. Such cells may generally be prepared in vitro or ex vivo, using standard procedures. For example, T cells may be isolated from bone marrow, peripheral blood, or a fraction of bone marrow or peripheral blood of a patient, using a commercially available cell separation system, such as the Isolex™ System, available from Nexell Therapeutics, Inc. (Irvine, Calif.; see also U.S. Pat. No. 5,240,856; U.S. Pat. No. 5,215,926; WO 89/06280; WO 91/16116 and WO 92/07243). Alternatively, T cells may be derived from related or unrelated humans, non-human mammals, cell lines or cultures.

T cells may be stimulated with a prostate-specific polypeptide, polynucleotide encoding a prostate-specific polypeptide and/or an antigen presenting cell (APC) that expresses such a polypeptide. Such stimulation is performed under conditions and for a time sufficient to permit the generation of T cells that are specific for the polypeptide. Preferably, a prostate-specific polypeptide or polynucleotide is present within a delivery vehicle, such as a microsphere, to facilitate the generation of specific T cells.

T cells are considered to be specific for a prostate-specific polypeptide if the T cells specifically proliferate, secrete cytokines or kill target cells coated with the polypeptide or expressing a gene encoding the polypeptide. T cell specificity may be evaluated using any of a variety of standard techniques. For example, within a chromium release assay or proliferation assay, a stimulation index of more than two fold increase in lysis and/or proliferation, compared to negative controls, indicates T cell specificity. Such assays may be performed, for example, as described in Chen et al., Cancer Res. 54:1065-1070, 1994. Alternatively, detection of the proliferation of T cells may be accomplished by a variety of known techniques. For example, T cell proliferation can be detected by measuring an increased rate of DNA synthesis (e.g., by pulse-labeling cultures of T cells with tritiated thymidine and measuring the amount of tritiated thymidine incorporated into DNA). Contact with a prostate-specific polypeptide (100 ng/ml-100 μg/ml, preferably 200 ng/ml-25 μg/ml) for 3-7 days should result in at least a two fold increase in proliferation of the T cells. Contact as described above for 2-3 hours should result in activation of the T cells, as measured using standard cytokine assays in which a two fold increase in the level of cytokine release (e.g., TNF or IFN-γ) is indicative of T cell activation (see Coligan et al., Current Protocols in Immunology, vol. 1, Wiley Interscience (Greene 1998)). T cells that have been activated in response to a prostate-specific polypeptide, polynucleotide or polypeptide-expressing APC may be CD4⁺ and/or CD8⁺. prostate-specific protein-specific T cells may be expanded using standard techniques. Within preferred embodiments, the T cells are derived from a patient, a related donor or an unrelated donor, and are administered to the patient following stimulation and expansion.

For therapeutic purposes, CD4⁺ or CD8⁺ T cells that proliferate in response to a prostate-specific polypeptide, polynucleotide or APC can be expanded in number either in vitro or in vivo. Proliferation of such T cells in vitro may be accomplished in a variety of ways. For example, the T cells can be re-exposed to a prostate-specific polypeptide, or a short peptide corresponding to an immunogenic portion of such a polypeptide, with or without the addition of T cell growth factors, such as interleukin-2, and/or stimulator cells that synthesize a prostate-specific polypeptide. Alternatively, one or more T cells that proliferate in the presence of a prostate-specific protein can be expanded in number by cloning. Methods for cloning cells are well known in the art, and include limiting dilution.

Pharmaceutical Compositions

In additional embodiments, the present invention concerns formulation of one or more of the polynucleotide, polypeptide, T-cell and/or antibody compositions disclosed herein in pharmaceutically-acceptable solutions for administration to a cell or an animal, either alone, or in combination with one or more other modalities of therapy.

It will also be understood that, if desired, the nucleic acid segment, RNA, DNA or PNA compositions that express a polypeptide as disclosed herein may be administered in combination with other agents as well, such as, e.g., other proteins or polypeptides or various pharmaceutically-active agents. In fact, there is virtually no limit to other components that may also be included, given that the additional agents do not cause a significant adverse effect upon contact with the target cells or host tissues. The compositions may thus be delivered along with various other agents as required in the particular instance. Such compositions may be purified from host cells or other biological sources, or alternatively may be chemically synthesized as described herein. Likewise, such compositions may further comprise substituted or derivatized RNA or DNA compositions.

Formulation of pharmaceutically-acceptable excipients and carrier solutions is well-known to those of skill in the art, as is the development of suitable dosing and treatment regimens for using the particular compositions described herein in a variety of treatment regimens, including e.g., oral, parenteral, intravenous, intranasal, and intramuscular administration and formulation.

1. Oral Delivery

In certain applications, the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein may be delivered via oral administration to an animal. As such, these compositions may be formulated with an inert diluent or with an assimilable edible carrier, or they may be enclosed in hard- or soft-shell gelatin capsule, or they may be compressed into tablets, or they may be incorporated directly with the food of the diet.

The active compounds may even be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of ingestible tablets, buccal tables, troches, capsules, elixirs, suspensions, syrups, wafers, and the like (Mathiowitz et al., 1997; Hwang et al., 1998; U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,515; U.S. Pat. No. 5,580,579 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,792,451, each specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). The tablets, troches, pills, capsules and the like may also contain the following: a binder, as gum tragacanth, acacia, cornstarch, or gelatin; excipients, such as dicalcium phosphate; a disintegrating agent, such as corn starch, potato starch, alginic acid and the like; a lubricant, such as magnesium stearate; and a sweetening agent, such as sucrose, lactose or saccharin may be added or a flavoring agent, such as peppermint, oil of wintergreen, or cherry flavoring. When the dosage unit form is a capsule, it may contain, in addition to materials of the above type, a liquid carrier. Various other materials may be present as coatings or to otherwise modify the physical form of the dosage unit. For instance, tablets, pills, or capsules may be coated with shellac, sugar, or both. A syrup of elixir may contain the active compound sucrose as a sweetening agent methyl and propylparabens as preservatives, a dye and flavoring, such as cherry or orange flavor. Of course, any material used in preparing any dosage unit form should be pharmaceutically pure and substantially non-toxic in the amounts employed. In addition, the active compounds may be incorporated into sustained-release preparation and formulations.

Typically, these formulations may contain at least about 0.1% of the active compound or more, although the percentage of the active ingredient(s) may, of course, be varied and may conveniently be between about 1 or 2% and about 60% or 70% or more of the weight or volume of the total formulation. Naturally, the amount of active compound(s) in each therapeutically useful composition may be prepared is such a way that a suitable dosage will be obtained in any given unit dose of the compound. Factors such as solubility, bioavailability, biological half-life, route of administration, product shelf life, as well as other pharmacological considerations will be contemplated by one skilled in the art of preparing such pharmaceutical formulations, and as such, a variety of dosages and treatment regimens may be desirable.

For oral administration the compositions of the present invention may alternatively be incorporated with one or more excipients in the form of a mouthwash, dentifrice, buccal tablet, oral spray, or sublingual orally-administered formulation. For example, a mouthwash may be prepared incorporating the active ingredient in the required amount in an appropriate solvent, such as a sodium borate solution (Dobell's Solution). Alternatively, the active ingredient may be incorporated into an oral solution such as one containing sodium borate, glycerin and potassium bicarbonate, or dispersed in a dentifrice, or added in a therapeutically-effective amount to a composition that may include water, binders, abrasives, flavoring agents, foaming agents, and humectants. Alternatively the compositions may be fashioned into a tablet or solution form that may be placed under the tongue or otherwise dissolved in the mouth.

2. Injectable Delivery

In certain circumstances it will be desirable to deliver the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein parenterally, intravenously, intramuscularly, or even intraperitoneally as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,543,158; U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,515 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,399,363 (each specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Solutions of the active compounds as free base or pharmacologically acceptable salts may be prepared in water suitably mixed with a surfactant, such as hydroxypropylcellulose. Dispersions may also be prepared in glycerol, liquid polyethylene glycols, and mixtures thereof and in oils. Under ordinary conditions of storage and use, these preparations contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms.

The pharmaceutical forms suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions (U.S. Pat. No. 5,466,468, specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). In all cases the form must be sterile and must be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms, such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), suitable mixtures thereof, and/or vegetable oils. Proper fluidity may be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. The prevention of the action of microorganisms can be facilitated by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars or sodium chloride. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by the use in the compositions of agents delaying absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.

For parenteral administration in an aqueous solution, for example, the solution should be suitably buffered if necessary and the liquid diluent first rendered isotonic with sufficient saline or glucose. These particular aqueous solutions are especially suitable for intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous and intraperitoneal administration. In this connection, a sterile aqueous medium that can be employed will be known to those of skill in the art in light of the present disclosure. For example, one dosage may be dissolved in 1 ml of isotonic NaCl solution and either added to 1000 ml of hypodermoclysis fluid or injected at the proposed site of infusion, (see for example, “Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences” 15th Edition, pages 1035-1038 and 1570-1580). Some variation in dosage will necessarily occur depending on the condition of the subject being treated. The person responsible for administration will, in any event, determine the appropriate dose for the individual subject. Moreover, for human administration, preparations should meet sterility, pyrogenicity, and the general safety and purity standards as required by FDA Office of Biologics standards.

Sterile injectable solutions are prepared by incorporating the active compounds in the required amount in the appropriate solvent with various of the other ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the various sterilized active ingredients into a sterile vehicle which contains the basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum-drying and freeze-drying techniques which yield a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.

The compositions disclosed herein may be formulated in a neutral or salt form. Pharmaceutically-acceptable salts, include the acid addition salts (formed with the free amino groups of the protein) and which are formed with inorganic acids such as, for example, hydrochloric or phosphoric acids, or such organic acids as acetic, oxalic, tartaric, mandelic, and the like. Salts formed with the free carboxyl groups can also be derived from inorganic bases such as, for example, sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, or ferric hydroxides, and such organic bases as isopropylamine, trimethylamine, histidine, procaine and the like. Upon formulation, solutions will be administered in a manner compatible with the dosage formulation and in such amount as is therapeutically effective. The formulations are easily administered in a variety of dosage forms such as injectable solutions, drug-release capsules, and the like.

As used herein, “carrier” includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, vehicles, coatings, diluents, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, buffers, carrier solutions, suspensions, colloids, and the like. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutical active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active ingredient, its use in the therapeutic compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active ingredients can also be incorporated into the compositions.

The phrase “pharmaceutically-acceptable” refers to molecular entities and compositions that do not produce an allergic or similar untoward reaction when administered to a human. The preparation of an aqueous composition that contains a protein as an active ingredient is well understood in the art. Typically, such compositions are prepared as injectables, either as liquid solutions or suspensions; solid forms suitable for solution in, or suspension in, liquid prior to injection can also be prepared. The preparation can also be emulsified.

3. Nasal Delivery

In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions may be delivered by intranasal sprays, inhalation, and/or other aerosol delivery vehicles. Methods for delivering genes, nucleic acids, and peptide compositions directly to the lungs via nasal aerosol sprays has been described e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 5,756,353 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,804,212 (each specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Likewise, the delivery of drugs using intranasal microparticle resins (Takenaga et al., 1998) and lysophosphatidyl-glycerol compounds (U.S. Pat. No. 5,725,871, specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety) are also well-known in the pharmaceutical arts. Likewise, transmucosal drug delivery in the form of a polytetrafluoroetheylene support matrix is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,780,045 (specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).

4. Liposome-, Nanocapsule-, and Microparticle-Mediated Delivery

In certain embodiments, the inventors contemplate the use of liposomes, nanocapsules, microparticles, microspheres, lipid particles, vesicles, and the like, for the introduction of the compositions of the present invention into suitable host cells. In particular, the compositions of the present invention may be formulated for delivery either encapsulated in a lipid particle, a liposome, a vesicle, a nanosphere, or a nanoparticle or the like.

Such formulations may be preferred for the introduction of pharmaceutically-acceptable formulations of the nucleic acids or constructs disclosed herein. The formation and use of liposomes is generally known to those of skill in the art (see for example, Couvreur et al., 1977; Couvreur, 1988; Lasic, 1998; which describes the use of liposomes and nanocapsules in the targeted antibiotic therapy for intracellular bacterial infections and diseases). Recently, liposomes were developed with improved serum stability and circulation half-times (Gabizon and Papahadjopoulos, 1988; Allen and Choun, 1987; U.S. Pat. No. 5,741,516, specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Further, various methods of liposome and liposome like preparations as potential drug carriers have been reviewed (Takakura, 1998; Chandran et al., 1997; Margalit, 1995; U.S. Pat. No. 5,567,434; U.S. Pat. No. 5,552,157; U.S. Pat. No. 5,565,213; U.S. Pat. No. 5,738,868 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,795,587, each specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).

Liposomes have been used successfully with a number of cell types that are normally resistant to transfection by other procedures including T cell suspensions, primary hepatocyte cultures and PC 12 cells (Renneisen et al., 1990; Muller et al., 1990). In addition, liposomes are free of the DNA length constraints that are typical of viral-based delivery systems. Liposomes have been used effectively to introduce genes, drugs (Heath and Martin, 1986; Heath et al., 1986; Balazsovits et al., 1989; Fresta and Puglisi, 1996), radiotherapeutic agents (Pikul et al., 1987), enzymes (Imaizumi et al., 1990a; Imaizumi et al., 1990b), viruses (Faller and Baltimore, 1984), transcription factors and allosteric effectors (Nicolau and Gersonde, 1979) into a variety of cultured cell lines and animals. In addition, several successful clinical trails examining the effectiveness of liposome-mediated drug delivery have been completed (Lopez-Berestein et al., 1985a; 1985b; Coune, 1988; Sculier et al., 1988). Furthermore, several studies suggest that the use of liposomes is not associated with autoimmune responses, toxicity or gonadal localization after systemic delivery (Mori and Fukatsu, 1992).

Liposomes are formed from phospholipids that are dispersed in an aqueous medium and spontaneously form multilamellar concentric bilayer vesicles (also termed multilamellar vesicles (MLVs). MLVs generally have diameters of from 25 nm to 4 μm. Sonication of MLVs results in the formation of small unilamellar vesicles (SUVs) with diameters in the range of 200 to 500 Å, containing an aqueous solution in the core.

Liposomes bear resemblance to cellular membranes and are contemplated for use in connection with the present invention as carriers for the peptide compositions. They are widely suitable as both water- and lipid-soluble substances can be entrapped, i.e. in the aqueous spaces and within the bilayer itself, respectively. It is possible that the drug-bearing liposomes may even be employed for site-specific delivery of active agents by selectively modifying the liposomal formulation.

In addition to the teachings of Couvreur et al. (1977; 1988), the following information may be utilized in generating liposomal formulations. Phospholipids can form a variety of structures other than liposomes when dispersed in water, depending on the molar ratio of lipid to water. At low ratios the liposome is the preferred structure. The physical characteristics of liposomes depend on pH, ionic strength and the presence of divalent cations. Liposomes can show low permeability to ionic and polar substances, but at elevated temperatures undergo a phase transition which markedly alters their permeability. The phase transition involves a change from a closely packed, ordered structure, known as the gel state, to a loosely packed, less-ordered structure, known as the fluid state. This occurs at a characteristic phase-transition temperature and results in an increase in permeability to ions, sugars and drugs.

In addition to temperature, exposure to proteins can alter the permeability of liposomes. Certain soluble proteins, such as cytochrome c, bind, deform and penetrate the bilayer, thereby causing changes in permeability. Cholesterol inhibits this penetration of proteins, apparently by packing the phospholipids more tightly. It is contemplated that the most useful liposome formations for antibiotic and inhibitor delivery will contain cholesterol.

The ability to trap solutes varies between different types of liposomes. For example, MLVs are, moderately efficient at trapping solutes, but SUVs are extremely inefficient. SUVs offer the advantage of homogeneity and reproducibility in size distribution, however, and a compromise between size and trapping efficiency is offered by large unilamellar vesicles (LUVs). These are prepared by ether evaporation and are three to four times more efficient at solute entrapment than MLVs.

In addition to liposome characteristics, an important determinant in entrapping compounds is the physicochemical properties of the compound itself. Polar compounds are trapped in the aqueous spaces and nonpolar compounds bind to the lipid bilayer of the vesicle. Polar compounds are released through permeation or when the bilayer is broken, but nonpolar compounds remain affiliated with the bilayer unless it is disrupted by temperature or exposure to lipoproteins. Both types show maximum efflux rates at the phase transition temperature.

Liposomes interact with cells via four different mechanisms: endocytosis by phagocytic cells of the reticuloendothelial system such as macrophages and neutrophils; adsorption to the cell surface, either by nonspecific weak hydrophobic or electrostatic forces, or by specific interactions with cell-surface components; fusion with the plasma cell membrane by insertion of the lipid bilayer of the liposome into the plasma membrane, with simultaneous release of liposomal contents into the cytoplasm; and by transfer of liposomal lipids to cellular or subcellular membranes, or vice versa, without any association of the liposome contents. It often is difficult to determine which mechanism is operative and more than one may operate at the same time.

The fate and disposition of intravenously injected liposomes depend on their physical properties, such as size, fluidity, and surface charge. They may persist in tissues for h or days, depending on their composition, and half lives in the blood range from min to several h. Larger liposomes, such as MLVs and LUVs, are taken up rapidly by phagocytic cells of the reticuloendothelial system, but physiology of the circulatory system restrains the exit of such large species at most sites. They can exit only in places where large openings or pores exist in the capillary endothelium, such as the sinusoids of the liver or spleen. Thus, these organs are the predominate site of uptake. On the other hand, SUVs show a broader tissue distribution but still are sequestered highly in the liver and spleen. In general, this in vivo behavior limits the potential targeting of liposomes to only those organs and tissues accessible to their large size. These include the blood, liver, spleen, bone marrow, and lymphoid organs.

Targeting is generally not a limitation in terms of the present invention. However, should specific targeting be desired, methods are available for this to be accomplished. Antibodies may be used to bind to the liposome surface and to direct the antibody and its drug contents to specific antigenic receptors located on a particular cell-type surface. Carbohydrate determinants (glycoprotein or glycolipid cell-surface components that play a role in cell-cell recognition, interaction and adhesion) may also be used as recognition sites as they have potential in directing liposomes to particular cell types. Mostly, it is contemplated that intravenous injection of liposomal preparations would be used, but other routes of administration are also conceivable.

Alternatively, the invention provides for pharmaceutically-acceptable nanocapsule formulations of the compositions of the present invention. Nanocapsules can generally entrap compounds in a stable and reproducible way (Henry-Michelland et al., 1987; Quintanar-Guerrero et al., 1998; Douglas et al., 1987). To avoid side effects due to intracellular polymeric overloading, such ultrafine particles (sized around 0.1 μm) should be designed using polymers able to be degraded in vivo. Biodegradable polyalkyl-cyanoacrylate nanoparticles that meet these requirements are contemplated for use in the present invention. Such particles may be are easily made, as described (Couvreur et al., 1980; 1988; zur Muhlen et al., 1998; Zambaux et al. 1998; Pinto-Alphandry et al., 1995 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,145,684, specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).

Immunogenic Compositions

In certain preferred embodiments of the present invention, immunogenic compositions, or vaccines, are provided. The immunogenic compositions will generally comprise one or more pharmaceutical compositions, such as those discussed above, in combination with an immunostimulant. An immunostimulant may be any substance that enhances or potentiates an immune response (antibody and/or cell-mediated) to an exogenous antigen. Examples of immunostimulants include adjuvants, biodegradable microspheres (e.g., polylactic galactide) and liposomes (into which the compound is incorporated; see e.g., Fullerton, U.S. Pat. No. 4,235,877). Vaccine preparation is generally described in, for example, M. F. Powell and M. J. Newman, eds., “Vaccine Design (the subunit and adjuvant approach),” Plenum Press (New York, 1995). Pharmaceutical compositions and immunogenic compositions within the scope of the present invention may also contain other compounds, which may be biologically active or inactive. For example, one or more immunogenic portions of other tumor antigens may be present, either incorporated into a fusion polypeptide or as a separate compound, within the composition.

Illustrative immunogenic compositions may contain DNA encoding one or more of the polypeptides as described above, such that the polypeptide is generated in situ. As noted above, the DNA may be present within any of a variety of delivery systems known to those of ordinary skill in the art, including nucleic acid expression systems, bacteria and viral expression systems. Numerous gene delivery techniques are well known in the art, such as those described by Rolland, Crit. Rev. Therap. Drug Carrier Systems 15:143-198, 1998, and references cited therein. Appropriate nucleic acid expression systems contain the necessary DNA sequences for expression in the patient (such as a suitable promoter and terminating signal). Bacterial delivery systems involve the administration of a bacterium (such as Bacillus-Calmette-Guerrin) that expresses an immunogenic portion of the polypeptide on its cell surface or secretes such an epitope. In a preferred embodiment, the DNA may be introduced using a viral expression system (e.g., vaccinia or other pox virus, retrovirus, or adenovirus), which may involve the use of a non-pathogenic (defective), replication competent virus. Suitable systems are disclosed, for example, in Fisher-Hoch et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:317-321, 1989; Flexner et al., Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci. 569:86-103, 1989; Flexner et al., Vaccine 8:17-21, 1990; U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,603,112, 4,769,330, and 5,017,487; WO 89/01973; U.S. Pat. No. 4,777,127; GB 2,200,651; EP 0,345,242; WO 91/02805; Berkner, Biotechniques 6:616-627, 1988; Rosenfeld et al., Science 252:431-434, 1991; Kolls et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:215-219, 1994; Kass-Eisler et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:11498-11502, 1993; Guzman et al., Circulation 88:2838-2848, 1993; and Guzman et al., Cir. Res. 73:1202-1207, 1993. Techniques for incorporating DNA into such expression systems are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. The DNA may also be “naked,” as described, for example, in Ulmer et al., Science 259:1745-1749, 1993 and reviewed by Cohen, Science 259:1691-1692, 1993. The uptake of naked DNA may be increased by coating the DNA onto biodegradable beads, which are efficiently transported into the cells. It will be apparent that an immunogenic composition may comprise both a polynucleotide and a polypeptide component. Such immunogenic compositions may provide for an enhanced immune response.

It will be apparent that an immunogenic composition may contain pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the polynucleotides and polypeptides provided herein. Such salts may be prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic bases, including organic bases (e.g., salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines and basic amino acids) and inorganic bases (e.g., sodium, potassium, lithium, ammonium, calcium and magnesium salts).

While any suitable carrier known to those of ordinary skill in the art may be employed in the compositions of this invention, the type of carrier will vary depending on the mode of administration. Compositions of the present invention may be formulated for any appropriate manner of administration, including for example, topical, oral, nasal, intravenous, intracranial, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous or intramuscular administration. For parenteral administration, such as subcutaneous injection, the carrier preferably comprises water, saline, alcohol, a fat, a wax or a buffer. For oral administration, any of the above carriers or a solid carrier, such as mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, talcum, cellulose, glucose, sucrose, and magnesium carbonate, may be employed. Biodegradable microspheres (e.g., polylactate polyglycolate) may also be employed as carriers for the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention. Suitable biodegradable microspheres are disclosed, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,897,268; 5,075,109; 5,928,647; 5,811,128; 5,820,883; 5,853,763; 5,814,344 and 5,942,252. One may also employ a carrier comprising the particulate-protein complexes described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,928,647, which are capable of inducing a class I-restricted cytotoxic T lymphocyte responses in a host.

Such compositions may also comprise buffers (e.g., neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline), carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose or dextrans), mannitol, proteins, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine, antioxidants, bacteriostats, chelating agents such as EDTA or glutathione, adjuvants (e.g., aluminum hydroxide), solutes that render the formulation isotonic, hypotonic or weakly hypertonic with the blood of a recipient, suspending agents, thickening agents and/or preservatives. Alternatively, compositions of the present invention may be formulated as a lyophilizate. Compounds may also be encapsulated within liposomes using well known technology.

Any of a variety of immunostimulants may be employed in the immunogenic compositions of this invention. For example, an adjuvant may be included. Most adjuvants contain a substance designed to protect the antigen from rapid catabolism, such as aluminum hydroxide or mineral oil, and a stimulator of immune responses, such as lipid A, Bortadella pertussis or Mycobacterium tuberculosis derived proteins. Suitable adjuvants are commercially available as, for example, Freund's Incomplete Adjuvant and Complete Adjuvant (Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.); Merck Adjuvant 65 (Merck and Company, Inc., Rahway, N.J.); AS-2 (SmithKline Beecham, Philadelphia, Pa.); aluminum salts such as aluminum hydroxide gel (alum) or aluminum phosphate; salts of calcium, iron or zinc; an insoluble suspension of acylated tyrosine; acylated sugars; cationically or anionically derivatized polysaccharides; polyphosphazenes; biodegradable microspheres; monophosphoryl lipid A and quil A. Cytokines, such as GM-CSF or interleukin-2, -7, or -12, may also be used as adjuvants.

Within the immunogenic compositions provided herein, the adjuvant composition is preferably designed to induce an immune response predominantly of the Th1 type. High levels of Th1-type cytokines (e.g., IFN-γ, TNFα; IL-2 and IL-12) tend to favor the induction of cell mediated immune responses to an administered antigen. In contrast, high levels of Th2-type cytokines (e.g., IL-4, IL-5, IL-6 and IL-10) tend to favor the induction of humoral immune responses. Following application of an immunogenic composition as provided herein, a patient will support an immune response that includes Th1- and Th2-type responses. Within a preferred embodiment, in which a response is predominantly Th1-type, the level of Th1-type cytokines will increase to a greater extent than the level of Th2-type cytokines. The levels of these cytokines may be readily assessed using standard assays. For a review of the families of cytokines, see Mosmann and Coffman, Ann. Rev. Immunol. 7:145-173, 1989.

Preferred adjuvants for use in eliciting a predominantly Th1-type response include, for example, a combination of monophosphoryl lipid A, preferably 3-de-O-acylated monophosphoryl lipid A (3D-MPL), together with an aluminum salt. MPL adjuvants are available from Corixa Corporation (Seattle, Wash.; see U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,436,727; 4,877,611; 4,866,034 and 4,912,094). CpG-containing oligonucleotides (in which the CpG dinucleotide is unmethylated) also induce a predominantly Th1 response. Such oligonucleotides are well known and are described, for example, in WO 96/02555, WO 99/33488 and U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,008,200 and 5,856,462. Immunostimulatory DNA sequences are also described, for example, by Sato et al., Science 273:352, 1996. Another preferred adjuvant is a saponin, preferably QS21 (Aquila Biopharmaceuticals Inc., Framingham, Mass.), which may be used alone or in combination with other adjuvants. For example, an enhanced system involves the combination of a monophosphoryl lipid A and saponin derivative, such as the combination of QS21 and 3D-MPL as described in WO 94/00153, or a less reactogenic composition where the QS21 is quenched with cholesterol, as described in WO 96/33739. Other preferred formulations comprise an oil-in-water emulsion and tocopherol. A particularly potent adjuvant formulation involving QS21, 3D-MPL and tocopherol in an oil-in-water emulsion is described in WO 95/17210.

Other preferred adjuvants include Montanide ISA 720 (Seppic, France), SAF (Chiron, Calif., United States), ISCOMS (CSL), MF-59 (Chiron), the SBAS series of adjuvants (e.g., SBAS-2 or SBAS-4, available from SmithKline Beecham, Rixensart, Belgium), Detox (Corixa, Hamilton, Mont.), RC-529 (Corixa, Hamilton, Mont.) and other aminoalkyl glucosaminide 4-phosphates (AGPs), such as those described in pending U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 08/853,826 and 09/074,720, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.

Any immunogenic composition provided herein may be prepared using well known methods that result in a combination of antigen, immune response enhancer and a suitable carrier or excipient. The compositions described herein may be administered as part of a sustained release formulation (i.e., a formulation such as a capsule, sponge or gel (composed of polysaccharides, for example) that effects a slow release of compound following administration). Such formulations may generally be prepared using well known technology (see, e.g., Coombes et al., Vaccine 14:1429-1438, 1996) and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at the desired target site. Sustained-release formulations may contain a polypeptide, polynucleotide or antibody dispersed in a carrier matrix and/or contained within a reservoir surrounded by a rate controlling membrane.

Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable; preferably the formulation provides a relatively constant level of active component release. Such carriers include microparticles of poly(lactide-co-glycolide), polyacrylate, latex, starch, cellulose, dextran and the like. Other delayed-release carriers include supramolecular biovectors, which comprise a non-liquid hydrophilic core (e.g., a cross-linked polysaccharide or oligosaccharide) and, optionally, an external layer comprising an amphiphilic compound, such as a phospholipid (see e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,151,254 and PCT applications WO 94/20078, WO/94/23701 and WO 96/06638). The amount of active compound contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.

Any of a variety of delivery vehicles may be employed within pharmaceutical compositions and immunogenic compositions to facilitate production of an antigen-specific immune response that targets tumor cells. Delivery vehicles include antigen presenting cells (APCs), such as dendritic cells, macrophages, B cells, monocytes and other cells that may be engineered to be efficient APCs. Such cells may, but need not, be genetically modified to increase the capacity for presenting the antigen, to improve activation and/or maintenance of the T cell response, to have anti-tumor effects per se and/or to be immunologically compatible with the receiver (i.e., matched HLA haplotype). APCs may generally be isolated from any of a variety of biological fluids and organs, including tumor and peritumoral tissues, and may be autologous, allogeneic, syngeneic or xenogeneic cells.

Certain preferred embodiments of the present invention use dendritic cells or progenitors thereof as antigen-presenting cells. Dendritic cells are highly potent APCs (Banchereau and Steinman, Nature 392:245-251, 1998) and have been shown to be effective as a physiological adjuvant for eliciting prophylactic or therapeutic antitumor immunity (see Timmerman, and Levy, Ann. Rev. Med. 50:507-529, 1999). In general, dendritic cells may be identified based on their typical shape (stellate in situ, with marked cytoplasmic processes (dendrites) visible in vitro), their ability to take up, process and present antigens with high efficiency and their ability to activate naïve T cell responses. Dendritic cells may, of course, be engineered to express specific cell-surface receptors or ligands that are not commonly found on dendritic cells in vivo or ex vivo, and such modified dendritic cells are contemplated by the present invention. As an alternative to dendritic cells, secreted vesicles antigen-loaded dendritic cells (called exosomes) may be used within an immunogenic composition (see Zitvogel et al., Nature Med. 4:594-600, 1998).

Dendritic cells and progenitors may be obtained from peripheral blood, bone marrow, tumor-infiltrating cells, peritumoral tissues-infiltrating cells, lymph nodes, spleen, skin, umbilical cord blood or any other suitable tissue or fluid. For example, dendritic cells may be differentiated ex vivo by adding a combination of cytokines such as GM-CSF, IL-4, IL-13 and/or TNFα to cultures of monocytes harvested from peripheral blood. Alternatively, CD34 positive cells harvested from peripheral blood, umbilical cord blood or bone marrow may be differentiated into dendritic cells by adding to the culture medium combinations of GM-CSF, IL-3, TNFα, CD40 ligand, LPS, flt3 ligand and/or other compound(s) that induce differentiation, maturation and proliferation of dendritic cells.

Dendritic cells are conveniently categorized as “immature” and “mature” cells, which allows a simple way to discriminate between two well characterized phenotypes. However, this nomenclature should not be construed to exclude all possible intermediate stages of differentiation. Immature dendritic cells are characterized as APC with a high capacity for antigen uptake and processing, which correlates with the high expression of Fcγ receptor and mannose receptor. The mature phenotype is typically characterized by a lower expression of these markers, but a high expression of cell surface molecules responsible for T cell activation such as class I and class II MHC, adhesion molecules (e.g., CD54 and CD11) and costimulatory molecules (e.g., CD40, CD80, CD86 and 4-1BB).

APCs may generally be transfected with a polynucleotide encoding a prostate-specific protein (or portion or other variant thereof) such that the prostate-specific polypeptide, or an immunogenic portion thereof, is expressed on the cell surface. Such transfection may take place ex vivo, and a composition comprising such transfected cells may then be used for therapeutic purposes, as described herein. Alternatively, a gene delivery vehicle that targets a dendritic or other antigen presenting cell may be administered to a patient, resulting in transfection that occurs in vivo. In vivo and ex vivo transfection of dendritic cells, for example, may generally be performed using any methods known in the art, such as those described in WO 97/24447, or the gene gun approach described by Mahvi et al., Immunology and cell Biology 75:456-460, 1997. Antigen loading of dendritic cells may be achieved by incubating dendritic cells or progenitor cells with the prostate-specific polypeptide, DNA (naked or within a plasmid vector) or RNA; or with antigen-expressing recombinant bacterium or viruses (e.g., vaccinia, fowlpox, adenovirus or lentivirus vectors). Prior to loading, the polypeptide may be covalently conjugated to an immunological partner that provides T cell help (e.g., a carrier molecule). Alternatively, a dendritic cell may be pulsed with a non-conjugated immunological partner, separately or in the presence of the polypeptide.

Immunogenic compositions and pharmaceutical compositions may be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose containers, such as sealed ampoules or vials. Such containers are preferably hermetically sealed to preserve sterility of the formulation until use. In general, formulations may be stored as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles. Alternatively, a immunogenic composition or pharmaceutical composition may be stored in a freeze-dried condition requiring only the addition of a sterile liquid carrier immediately prior to use.

Cancer Therapy

In further aspects of the present invention, the compositions described herein may be used for immunotherapy of cancer, such as prostate cancer. Within such methods, pharmaceutical compositions and immunogenic compositions are typically administered to a patient. As used herein, a “patient” refers to any warm-blooded animal, preferably a human. A patient may or may not be afflicted with cancer. Accordingly, the above pharmaceutical compositions and immunogenic compositions may be used to prevent the development of a cancer or to treat a patient afflicted with a cancer. A cancer may be diagnosed using criteria generally accepted in the art, including the presence of a malignant tumor. Pharmaceutical compositions and immunogenic compositions may be administered either prior to or following surgical removal of primary tumors and/or treatment such as administration of radiotherapy or conventional chemotherapeutic drugs. Administration may be by any suitable method, including administration by intravenous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular, subcutaneous, intranasal, intradermal, anal, vaginal, topical and oral routes.

Within certain embodiments, immunotherapy may be active immunotherapy, in which treatment relies on the in vivo stimulation of the endogenous host immune system to react against tumors with the administration of immune response-modifying agents (such as polypeptides and polynucleotides as provided herein).

Within other embodiments, immunotherapy may be passive immunotherapy, in which treatment involves the delivery of agents with established tumor-immune reactivity (such as effector cells or antibodies) that can directly or indirectly mediate antitumor effects and does not necessarily depend on an intact host immune system. Examples of effector cells include T cells as discussed above, T lymphocytes (such as CD8⁺ cytotoxic T lymphocytes and CD4⁺ T-helper tumor-infiltrating lymphocytes), killer cells (such as Natural Killer cells and lymphokine-activated killer cells), B cells and antigen-presenting cells (such as dendritic cells and macrophages) expressing a polypeptide provided herein. T cell receptors and antibody receptors specific for the polypeptides recited herein may be cloned, expressed and transferred into other vectors or effector cells for adoptive immunotherapy. The polypeptides provided herein may also be used to generate antibodies or anti-idiotypic antibodies (as described above and in U.S. Pat. No. 4,918,164) for passive immunotherapy.

Effector cells may generally be obtained in sufficient quantities for adoptive immunotherapy by growth in vitro, as described herein. Culture conditions for expanding single antigen-specific effector cells to several billion in number with retention of antigen recognition in vivo are well known in the art. Such in vitro culture conditions typically use intermittent stimulation with antigen, often in the presence of cytokines (such as IL-2) and non-dividing feeder cells. As noted above, immunoreactive polypeptides as provided herein may be used to rapidly expand antigen-specific T cell cultures in order to generate a sufficient number of cells for immunotherapy. In particular, antigen-presenting cells, such as dendritic, macrophage, monocyte, fibroblast and/or B cells, may be pulsed with immunoreactive polypeptides or transfected with one or more polynucleotides using standard techniques, well known in the art. For example, antigen-presenting cells can be transfected with a polynucleotide having a promoter appropriate for increasing expression in a recombinant virus or other expression system. Cultured effector cells for use in therapy must be able to grow and distribute widely, and to survive long term in vivo. Studies have shown that cultured effector cells can be induced to grow in vivo and to survive long term in substantial numbers by repeated stimulation with antigen supplemented with IL-2 (see, for example, Cheever et al., Immunological Reviews 157:177, 1997).

Alternatively, a vector expressing a polypeptide recited herein may be introduced into antigen presenting cells taken from a patient and clonally propagated ex vivo for transplant back into the same patient. Transfected cells may be reintroduced into the patient using any means known in the art, preferably in sterile form by intravenous, intracavitary, intraperitoneal or intratumor administration.

Routes and frequency of administration of the therapeutic compositions described herein, as well as dosage, will vary from individual to individual, and may be readily established using standard techniques. In general, the pharmaceutical compositions and immunogenic compositions may be administered by injection (e.g., intracutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous or subcutaneous), intranasally (e.g., by aspiration) or orally. Preferably, between 1 and 10 doses may be administered over a 52 week period. Preferably, 6 doses are administered, at intervals of 1 month, and booster vaccinations may be given periodically thereafter. Alternate protocols may be appropriate for individual patients. A suitable dose is an amount of a compound that, when administered as described above, is capable of promoting an anti-tumor immune response, and is at least 10-50% above the basal (i.e., untreated) level. Such response can be monitored by measuring the anti-tumor antibodies in a patient or by vaccine-dependent generation of cytolytic effector cells capable of killing the patient's tumor cells in vitro. Such immunogenic compositions should also be capable of causing an immune response that leads to an improved clinical outcome (e.g., more frequent remissions, complete or partial or longer disease-free survival) in treated patients as compared to non-treated patients. In general, for pharmaceutical compositions and immunogenic compositions comprising one or more polypeptides, the amount of each polypeptide present in a dose ranges from about 25 μg to 5 mg per kg of host. Suitable dose sizes will vary with the size of the patient, but will typically range from about 0.1 mL to about 5 mL.

In general, an appropriate dosage and treatment regimen provides the active compound(s) in an amount sufficient to provide therapeutic and/or prophylactic benefit. Such a response can be monitored by establishing an improved clinical outcome (e.g., more frequent remissions, complete or partial, or longer disease-free survival) in treated patients as compared to non-treated patients. Increases in preexisting immune responses to a prostate-specific protein generally correlate with an improved clinical outcome. Such immune responses may generally be evaluated using standard proliferation, cytotoxicity or cytokine assays, which may be performed using samples obtained from a patient before and after treatment.

Cancer Detection and Diagnosis

In general, a cancer may be detected in a patient based on the presence of one or more prostate-specific proteins and/or polynucleotides encoding such proteins in a biological sample (for example, blood, sera, sputum urine and/or tumor biopsies) obtained from the patient. In other words, such proteins may be used as markers to indicate the presence or absence of a cancer such as prostate cancer. In addition, such proteins may be useful for the detection of other cancers. The binding agents provided herein generally permit detection of the level of antigen that binds to the agent in the biological sample. Polynucleotide primers and probes may be used to detect the level of mRNA encoding a tumor protein, which is also indicative of the presence or absence of a cancer. In general, a prostate-specific sequence should be present at a level that is at least three fold higher in prostate tissue than in other normal tissues.

There are a variety of assay formats known to those of ordinary skill in the art for using a binding agent to detect polypeptide markers in a sample. See, e.g., Harlow and Lane, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, 1988. In general, the presence or absence of a cancer in a patient may be determined by (a) contacting a biological sample obtained from a patient with a binding agent; (b) detecting in the sample a level of polypeptide that binds to the binding agent; and (c) comparing the level of polypeptide with a predetermined cut-off value.

In a preferred embodiment, the assay involves the use of binding agent immobilized on a solid support to bind to and remove the polypeptide from the remainder of the sample. The bound polypeptide may then be detected using a detection reagent that contains a reporter group and specifically binds to the binding agent/polypeptide complex. Such detection reagents may comprise, for example, a binding agent that specifically binds to the polypeptide or an antibody or other agent that specifically binds to the binding agent, such as an anti-immunoglobulin, protein G, protein A or a lectin. Alternatively, a competitive assay may be utilized, in which a polypeptide is labeled with a reporter group and allowed to bind to the immobilized binding agent after incubation of the binding agent with the sample. The extent to which components of the sample inhibit the binding of the labeled polypeptide to the binding agent is indicative of the reactivity of the sample with the immobilized binding agent. Suitable polypeptides for use within such assays include full length prostate-specific proteins and portions thereof to which the binding agent binds, as described above.

The solid support may be any material known to those of ordinary skill in the art to which the tumor protein may be attached. For example, the solid support may be a test well in a microtiter plate or a nitrocellulose or other suitable membrane. Alternatively, the support may be a bead or disc, such as glass, fiberglass, latex or a plastic material such as polystyrene or polyvinylchloride. The support may also be a magnetic particle or a fiber optic sensor, such as those disclosed, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,359,681. The binding agent may be immobilized on the solid support using a variety of techniques known to those of skill in the art, which are amply described in the patent and scientific literature. In the context of the present invention, the term “immobilization” refers to both noncovalent association, such as adsorption, and covalent attachment (which may be a direct linkage between the agent and functional groups on the support or may be a linkage by way of a cross-linking agent). Immobilization by adsorption to a well in a microtiter plate or to a membrane is preferred. In such cases, adsorption may be achieved by contacting the binding agent, in a suitable buffer, with the solid support for a suitable amount of time. The contact time varies with temperature, but is typically between about 1 hour and about 1 day. In general, contacting a well of a plastic microtiter plate (such as polystyrene or polyvinylchloride) with an amount of binding agent ranging from about 10 ng to about 10 μg, and preferably about 100 ng to about 1 μg, is sufficient to immobilize an adequate amount of binding agent.

Covalent attachment of binding agent to a solid support may generally be achieved by first reacting the support with a bifunctional reagent that will react with both the support and a functional group, such as a hydroxyl or amino group, on the binding agent. For example, the binding agent may be covalently attached to supports having an appropriate polymer coating using benzoquinone or by condensation of an aldehyde group on the support with an amine and an active hydrogen on the binding partner (see, e.g., Pierce Immunotechnology Catalog and Handbook, 1991, at A12-A13).

In certain embodiments, the assay is a two-antibody sandwich assay. This assay may be performed by first contacting an antibody that has been immobilized on a solid support, commonly the well of a microtiter plate, with the sample, such that polypeptides within the sample are allowed to bind to the immobilized antibody. Unbound sample is then removed from the immobilized polypeptide-antibody complexes and a detection reagent (preferably a second antibody capable of binding to a different site on the polypeptide) containing a reporter group is added. The amount of detection reagent that remains bound to the solid support is then determined using a method appropriate for the specific reporter group.

More specifically, once the antibody is immobilized on the support as described above, the remaining protein binding sites on the support are typically blocked. Any suitable blocking agent known to those of ordinary skill in the art, such as bovine serum albumin or Tween 20™ (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, Mo.). The immobilized antibody is then incubated with the sample, and polypeptide is allowed to bind to the antibody. The sample may be diluted with a suitable diluent, such as phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) prior to incubation. In general, an appropriate contact time (i.e., incubation time) is a period of time that is sufficient to detect the presence of polypeptide within a sample obtained from an individual with prostate cancer. Preferably, the contact time is sufficient to achieve a level of binding that is at least about 95% of that achieved at equilibrium between bound and unbound polypeptide. Those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that the time necessary to achieve equilibrium may be readily determined by assaying the level of binding that occurs over a period of time. At room temperature, an incubation time of about 30 minutes is generally sufficient.

Unbound sample may then be removed by washing the solid support with an appropriate buffer, such as PBS containing 0.1% Tween 20™. The second antibody, which contains a reporter group, may then be added to the solid support. Preferred reporter groups include those groups recited above.

The detection reagent is then incubated with the immobilized antibody-polypeptide complex for an amount of time sufficient to detect the bound polypeptide. An appropriate amount of time may generally be determined by assaying the level of binding that occurs over a period of time. Unbound detection reagent is then removed and bound detection reagent is detected using the reporter group. The method employed for detecting the reporter group depends upon the nature of the reporter group. For radioactive groups, scintillation counting or autoradiographic methods are generally appropriate. Spectroscopic methods may be used to detect dyes, luminescent groups and fluorescent groups. Biotin may be detected using avidin, coupled to a different reporter group (commonly a radioactive or fluorescent group or an enzyme). Enzyme reporter groups may generally be detected by the addition of substrate (generally for a specific period of time), followed by spectroscopic or other analysis of the reaction products.

To determine the presence or absence of a cancer, such as prostate cancer, the signal detected from the reporter group that remains bound to the solid support is generally compared to a signal that corresponds to a predetermined cut-off value. In one preferred embodiment, the cut-off value for the detection of a cancer is the average mean signal obtained when the immobilized antibody is incubated with samples from patients without the cancer. In general, a sample generating a signal that is three standard deviations above the predetermined cut-off value is considered positive for the cancer. In an alternate preferred embodiment, the cut-off value is determined using a Receiver Operator Curve, according to the method of Sackett et al., Clinical Epidemiology: A Basic Science for Clinical Medicine, Little Brown and Co., 1985, p. 106-7. Briefly, in this embodiment, the cut-off value may be determined from a plot of pairs of true positive rates (i.e., sensitivity) and false positive rates (100%-specificity) that correspond to each possible cut-off value for the diagnostic test result. The cut-off value on the plot that is the closest to the upper left-hand corner (i.e., the value that encloses the largest area) is the most accurate cut-off value, and a sample generating a signal that is higher than the cut-off value determined by this method may be considered positive. Alternatively, the cut-off value may be shifted to the left along the plot, to minimize the false positive rate, or to the right, to minimize the false negative rate. In general, a sample generating a signal that is higher than the cut-off value determined by this method is considered positive for a cancer.

In a related embodiment, the assay is performed in a flow-through or strip test format, wherein the binding agent is immobilized on a membrane, such as nitrocellulose. In the flow-through test, polypeptides within the sample bind to the immobilized binding agent as the sample passes through the membrane. A second, labeled binding agent then binds to the binding agent-polypeptide complex as a solution containing the second binding agent flows through the membrane. The detection of bound second binding agent may then be performed as described above. In the strip test format, one end of the membrane to which binding agent is bound is immersed in a solution containing the sample. The sample migrates along the membrane through a region containing second binding agent and to the area of immobilized binding agent. Concentration of second binding agent at the area of immobilized antibody indicates the presence of a cancer. Typically, the concentration of second binding agent at that site generates a pattern, such as a line, that can be read visually. The absence of such a pattern indicates a negative result. In general, the amount of binding agent immobilized on the membrane is selected to generate a visually discernible pattern when the biological sample contains a level of polypeptide that would be sufficient to generate a positive signal in the two-antibody sandwich assay, in the format discussed above. Preferred binding agents for use in such assays are antibodies and antigen-binding fragments thereof. Preferably, the amount of antibody immobilized on the membrane ranges from about 25 ng to about 1 μg, and more preferably from about 50 ng to about 500 ng. Such tests can typically be performed with a very small amount of biological sample.

Of course, numerous other assay protocols exist that are suitable for use with the tumor proteins or binding agents of the present invention. The above descriptions are intended to be exemplary only. For example, it will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art that the above protocols may be readily modified to use prostate-specific polypeptides to detect antibodies that bind to such polypeptides in a biological sample. The detection of such prostate-specific protein specific antibodies may correlate with the presence of a cancer.

A cancer may also, or alternatively, be detected based on the presence of T cells that specifically react with a prostate-specific protein in a biological sample. Within certain methods, a biological sample comprising CD4⁺ and/or CD8⁺ T cells isolated from a patient is incubated with a prostate-specific polypeptide, a polynucleotide encoding such a polypeptide and/or an APC that expresses at least an immunogenic portion of such a polypeptide, and the presence or absence of specific activation of the T cells is detected. Suitable biological samples include, but are not limited to, isolated T cells. For example, T cells may be isolated from a patient by routine techniques (such as by Ficoll/Hypaque density gradient centrifugation of peripheral blood lymphocytes). T cells may be incubated in vitro for 2-9 days (typically 4 days) at 37° C. with polypeptide (e.g., 5-25 μg/ml). It may be desirable to incubate another aliquot of a T cell sample in the absence of prostate-specific polypeptide to serve as a control. For CD4⁺ T cells, activation is preferably detected by evaluating proliferation of the T cells. For CD8⁺ T cells, activation is preferably detected by evaluating cytolytic activity. A level of proliferation that is at least two fold greater and/or a level of cytolytic activity that is at least 20% greater than in disease-free patients indicates the presence of a cancer in the patient.

As noted above, a cancer may also, or alternatively, be detected based on the level of mRNA encoding a prostate-specific protein in a biological sample. For example, at least two oligonucleotide primers may be employed in a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) based assay to amplify a portion of a prostate-specific cDNA derived from a biological sample, wherein at least one of the oligonucleotide primers is specific for (i.e., hybridizes to) a polynucleotide encoding the prostate-specific protein. The amplified cDNA is then separated and detected using techniques well known in the art, such as gel electrophoresis. Similarly, oligonucleotide probes that specifically hybridize to a polynucleotide encoding a prostate-specific protein may be used in a hybridization assay to detect the presence of polynucleotide encoding the tumor protein in a biological sample.

To permit hybridization under assay conditions, oligonucleotide primers and probes should comprise an oligonucleotide sequence that has at least about 60%, preferably at least about 75% and more preferably at least about 90%, identity to a portion of a polynucleotide encoding a prostate-specific protein that is at least 10 nucleotides, and preferably at least 20 nucleotides, in length. Preferably, oligonucleotide primers and/or probes hybridize to a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide described herein under moderately stringent conditions, as defined above. Oligonucleotide primers and/or probes which may be usefully employed in the diagnostic methods described herein preferably are at least 10-40 nucleotides in length. In a preferred embodiment, the oligonucleotide primers comprise at least 10 contiguous nucleotides, more preferably at least 15 contiguous nucleotides, of a DNA molecule having a sequence recited in SEQ ID NO: 1-111, 115-171, 173-175, 177, 179-305, 307-315, 326, 328, 330, 332-335, 340-375, 381, 382 and 384-476, 524, 526, 530, 531, 533, 535, 536, 552, 569-572, 587, 591, 593-606, 618-705, 709-774, 777 and 789. Techniques for both PCR based assays and hybridization assays are well known in the art (see, for example, Mullis et al., Cold Spring Harbor Symp. Quant. Biol., 51:263, 1987; Erlich ed., PCR Technology, Stockton Press, NY, 1989).

One preferred assay employs RT-PCR, in which PCR is applied in conjunction with reverse transcription. Typically, RNA is extracted from a biological sample, such as biopsy tissue, and is reverse transcribed to produce cDNA molecules. PCR amplification using at least one specific primer generates a cDNA molecule, which may be separated and visualized using, for example, gel electrophoresis. Amplification may be performed on biological samples taken from a test patient and from an individual who is not afflicted with a cancer. The amplification reaction may be performed on several dilutions of cDNA spanning two orders of magnitude. A two-fold or greater increase in expression in several dilutions of the test patient sample as compared to the same dilutions of the non-cancerous sample is typically considered positive.

In another embodiment, the compositions described herein may be used as markers for the progression of cancer. In this embodiment, assays as described above for the diagnosis of a cancer may be performed over time, and the change in the level of reactive polypeptide(s) or polynucleotide(s) evaluated. For example, the assays may be performed every 24-72 hours for a period of 6 months to 1 year, and thereafter performed as needed. In general, a cancer is progressing in those patients in whom the level of polypeptide or polynucleotide detected increases over time. In contrast, the cancer is not progressing when the level of reactive polypeptide or polynucleotide either remains constant or decreases with time.

Certain in vivo diagnostic assays may be performed directly on a tumor. One such assay involves contacting tumor cells with a binding agent. The bound binding agent may then be detected directly or indirectly via a reporter group. Such binding agents may also be used in histological applications. Alternatively, polynucleotide probes may be used within such applications.

As noted above, to improve sensitivity, multiple prostate-specific protein markers may be assayed within a given sample. It will be apparent that binding agents specific for different proteins provided herein may be combined within a single assay. Further, multiple primers or probes may be used concurrently. The selection of tumor protein markers may be based on routine experiments to determine combinations that results in optimal sensitivity. In addition, or alternatively, assays for tumor proteins provided herein may be combined with assays for other known tumor antigens.

Diagnostic Kits

The present invention further provides kits for use within any of the above diagnostic methods. Such kits typically comprise two or more components necessary for performing a diagnostic assay. Components may be compounds, reagents, containers and/or equipment. For example, one container within a kit may contain a monoclonal antibody or fragment thereof that specifically binds to a prostate-specific protein. Such antibodies or fragments may be provided attached to a support material, as described above. One or more additional containers may enclose elements, such as reagents or buffers, to be used in the assay. Such kits may also, or alternatively, contain a detection reagent as described above that contains a reporter group suitable for direct or indirect detection of antibody binding.

Alternatively, a kit may be designed to detect the level of mRNA encoding a prostate-specific protein in a biological sample. Such kits generally comprise at least one oligonucleotide probe or primer, as described above, that hybridizes to a polynucleotide encoding a prostate-specific protein. Such an oligonucleotide may be used, for example, within a PCR or hybridization assay. Additional components that may be present within such kits include a second oligonucleotide and/or a diagnostic reagent or container to facilitate the detection of a polynucleotide encoding a prostate-specific protein.

The following Examples are offered by way of illustration and not by way of limitation.

EXAMPLE 1 Isolation and Characterization of Prostate-Specific Polypeptides

This Example describes the isolation of certain prostate-specific polypeptides from a prostate tumor cDNA library.

A human prostate tumor cDNA expression library was constructed from prostate tumor poly A⁺ RNA using a Superscript Plasmid System for cDNA Synthesis and Plasmid Cloning kit (BRL Life Technologies, Gaithersburg, Md. 20897) following the manufacturer's protocol. Specifically, prostate tumor tissues were homogenized with polytron (Kinematica, Switzerland) and total RNA was extracted using Trizol reagent (BRL Life Technologies) as directed by the manufacturer. The poly A⁺ RNA was then purified using a Qiagen oligotex spin column mRNA purification kit (Qiagen, Santa Clarita, Calif. 91355) according to the manufacturer's protocol. First-strand cDNA was synthesized using the NotI/Oligo-dT18 primer. Double-stranded cDNA was synthesized, ligated with EcoRI/BAXI adaptors (Invitrogen, San Diego, Calif.) and digested with NotI. Following size fractionation with Chroma Spin-1000 columns (Clontech, Palo Alto, Calif.), the cDNA was ligated into the EcoRI/NotI site of pcDNA3.1 (Invitrogen) and transformed into ElectroMax E. coli DH10B cells (BRL Life Technologies) by electroporation.

Using the same procedure, a normal human pancreas cDNA expression library was prepared from a pool of six tissue specimens (Clontech). The cDNA libraries were characterized by determining the number of independent colonies, the percentage of clones that carried insert, the average insert size and by sequence analysis. The prostate tumor library contained 1.64×10⁷ independent colonies, with 70% of clones having an insert and the average insert size being 1745 base pairs. The normal pancreas cDNA library contained 3.3×10⁶ independent colonies, with 69% of clones having inserts and the average insert size being 1120 base pairs. For both libraries, sequence analysis showed that the majority of clones had a full length cDNA sequence and were synthesized from mRNA, with minimal rRNA and mitochondrial DNA contamination.

cDNA library subtraction was performed using the above prostate tumor and normal pancreas cDNA libraries, as described by Hara et al. (Blood, 84:189-199, 1994) with some modifications. Specifically, a prostate tumor-specific subtracted cDNA library was generated as follows. Normal pancreas cDNA library (70 μg) was digested with EcoRI, NotI, and SfuI, followed by a filling-in reaction with DNA polymerase Klenow fragment. After phenol-chloroform extraction and ethanol precipitation, the DNA was dissolved in 100 μl of H₂O, heat-denatured and mixed with 100 μl (100 μg) of Photoprobe biotin (Vector Laboratories, Burlingame, Calif.). As recommended by the manufacturer, the resulting mixture was irradiated with a 270 W sunlamp on ice for 20 minutes. Additional Photoprobe biotin (50 μl) was added and the biotinylation reaction was repeated. After extraction with butanol five times, the DNA was ethanol-precipitated and dissolved in 23 μl H₂O to form the driver DNA.

To form the tracer DNA, 10 μg prostate tumor cDNA library was digested with BamHI and XhoI, phenol chloroform extracted and passed through Chroma spin-400 columns (Clontech). Following ethanol precipitation, the tracer DNA was dissolved in 5 μl H₂O. Tracer DNA was mixed with 15 μl driver DNA and 20 μl of 2× hybridization buffer (1.5 M NaCl/10 mM EDTA/50 mM HEPES pH 7.5/0.2% sodium dodecyl sulfate), overlaid with mineral oil, and heat-denatured completely. The sample was immediately transferred into a 68° C. water bath and incubated for 20 hours (long hybridization [LH]). The reaction mixture was then subjected to a streptavidin treatment followed by phenol/chloroform extraction. This process was repeated three more times. Subtracted DNA was precipitated, dissolved in 12 μl H2O, mixed with 8 μl driver DNA and 20 μl of 2× hybridization buffer, and subjected to a hybridization at 68° C. for 2 hours (short hybridization [SH]). After removal of biotinylated double-stranded DNA, subtracted cDNA was ligated into BamHI/XhoI site of chloramphenicol resistant pBCSK⁺ (Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif. 92037) and transformed into ElectroMax E. coli DH10B cells by electroporation to generate a prostate tumor specific subtracted cDNA library (referred to as “prostate subtraction 1”).

To analyze the subtracted cDNA library, plasmid DNA was prepared from 100 independent clones, randomly picked from the subtracted prostate tumor specific library and grouped based on insert size. Representative cDNA clones were further characterized by DNA sequencing with a Perkin Elmer/Applied Biosystems Division Automated Sequencer Model 373A (Foster City, Calif.). Six cDNA clones, hereinafter referred to as F1-13, F1-12, F1-16, H1-1, H1-9 and H1-4, were shown to be abundant in the subtracted prostate-specific cDNA library. The determined 3′ and 5′ cDNA sequences for F1-12 are provided in SEQ ID NO: 2 and 3, respectively, with determined 3′ cDNA sequences for F1-13, F1-16, H1-1, H1-9 and H1-4 being provided in SEQ ID NO: 1 and 4-7, respectively.

The cDNA sequences for the isolated clones were compared to known sequences in the gene bank using the EMBL and GenBank databases (release 96). Four of the prostate tumor cDNA clones, F1-13, F1-16, H1-1, and H1-4, were determined to encode the following previously identified proteins: prostate specific antigen (PSA), human glandular kallikrein, human tumor expression enhanced gene, and mitochondria cytochrome C oxidase subunit II. H1-9 was found to be identical to a previously identified human autonomously replicating sequence. No significant homologies to the cDNA sequence for F1-12 were found.

Subsequent studies led to the isolation of a full-length cDNA sequence for F1-12 (also referred to as P504S). This sequence is provided in SEQ ID NO: 107, with the corresponding predicted amino acid sequence being provided in SEQ ID NO: 108. cDNA splice variants of P504S are provided in SEQ ID NO: 600-605.

To clone less abundant prostate tumor specific genes, cDNA library subtraction was performed by subtracting the prostate tumor cDNA library described above with the normal pancreas cDNA library and with the three most abundant genes in the previously subtracted prostate tumor specific cDNA library: human glandular kallikrein, prostate specific antigen (PSA), and mitochondria cytochrome C oxidase subunit II. Specifically, 1 μg each of human glandular kallikrein, PSA and mitochondria cytochrome C oxidase subunit II cDNAs in pcDNA3.1 were added to the driver DNA and subtraction was performed as described above to provide a second subtracted cDNA library hereinafter referred to as the “subtracted prostate tumor specific cDNA library with spike”.

Twenty-two cDNA clones were isolated from the subtracted prostate tumor specific cDNA library with spike. The determined 3′ and 5′ cDNA sequences for the clones referred to as J1-17, L1-12, N1-1862, J1-13, J1-19, J1-25, J1-24, K1-58, K1-63, L1-4 and L1-14 are provided in SEQ ID NOS: 8-9, 10-11, 12-13, 14-15, 16-17, 18-19, 20-21, 22-23, 24-25, 26-27 and 28-29, respectively. The determined 3′ cDNA sequences for the clones referred to as J1-12, J1-16, J1-21, K1-48, K1-55, L1-2, L1-6, N1-1858, N1-1860, N1-1861, N1-1864 are provided in SEQ ID NOS: 30-40, respectively. Comparison of these sequences with those in the gene bank as described above, revealed no significant homologies to three of the five most abundant DNA species, (J1-17, L1-12 and N1-1862; SEQ ID NOS: 8-9, 10-11 and 12-13, respectively). Of the remaining two most abundant species, one (J1-12; SEQ ID NO:30) was found to be identical to the previously identified human pulmonary surfactant-associated protein, and the other (K1-48; SEQ ID NO:33) was determined to have some homology to R. norvegicus mRNA for 2-arylpropionyl-CoA epimerase. Of the 17 less abundant cDNA clones isolated from the subtracted prostate tumor specific cDNA library with spike, four (J1-16, K1-55, L1-6 and N1-1864; SEQ ID NOS:31, 34, 36 and 40, respectively) were found to be identical to previously identified sequences, two (J1-21 and N1-1860; SEQ ID NOS: 32 and 38, respectively) were found to show some homology to non-human sequences, and two (L1-2 and N1-1861; SEQ ID NOS: 35 and 39, respectively) were found to show some homology to known human sequences. No significant homologies were found to the polypeptides J1-13, J1-19, J1-24, J1-25, K1-58, K1-63, L1-4, L1-14 (SEQ ID NOS: 14-15, 16-17, 20-21, 18-19, 22-23, 24-25, 26-27, 28-29, respectively).

Subsequent studies led to the isolation of full length cDNA sequences for J1-17, L1-12 and N1-1862 (SEQ ID NOS: 109-111, respectively). The corresponding predicted amino acid sequences are provided in SEQ ID NOS: 112-114. L1-12 is also referred to as P501S. A cDNA splice variant of P501S is provided in SEQ ID NO: 606.

In a further experiment, four additional clones were identified by subtracting a prostate tumor cDNA library with normal prostate cDNA prepared from a pool of three normal prostate poly A+ RNA (referred to as “prostate subtraction 2”). The determined cDNA sequences for these clones, hereinafter referred to as U1-3064, U1-3065, V1-3692 and 1A-3905, are provided in SEQ ID NO: 69-72, respectively. Comparison of the determined sequences with those in the gene bank revealed no significant homologies to U1-3065.

A second subtraction with spike (referred to as “prostate subtraction spike 2”) was performed by subtracting a prostate tumor specific cDNA library with spike with normal pancreas cDNA library and further spiked with PSA, J1-17, pulmonary surfactant-associated protein, mitochondrial DNA, cytochrome c oxidase subunit 11, N1′-1862, autonomously replicating sequence, L1-12 and tumor expression enhanced gene. Four additional clones, hereinafter referred to as V1-3686, R1-2330, 1B-3976 and V1-3679, were isolated. The determined cDNA sequences for these clones are provided in SEQ ID NO:73-76, respectively. Comparison of these sequences with those in the gene bank revealed no significant homologies to V1-3686 and R1-2330.

Further analysis of the three prostate subtractions described above (prostate subtraction 2, subtracted prostate tumor specific cDNA library with spike, and prostate subtraction spike 2) resulted in the identification of sixteen additional clones, referred to as 1G-4736, 1G-4738, 1G-4741, 1G-4744, 1G-4734, 1H-4774, 1H-4781, 1H-4785, 1H-4787, 1H-4796, 1I-4810, 1I-4811, 1J-4876, 1K-4884 and 1K-4896. The determined cDNA sequences for these clones are provided in SEQ ID NOS: 77-92, respectively. Comparison of these sequences with those in the gene bank as described above, revealed no significant homologies to 1G-4741, 1G-4734, 1I-4807, 1J-4876 and 1K-4896 (SEQ ID NOS: 79, 81, 87, 90 and 92, respectively). Further analysis of the isolated clones led to the determination of extended cDNA sequences for 1G-4736, 1G-4738, 1G-4741, 1G-4744, 1H-4774, 1H-4781, 1H-4785, 1H-4787, 1H-4796, 1I-4807, 1I-4876, 1K-4884 and 1K-4896, provided in SEQ ID NOS: 179-188 and 191-193, respectively, and to the determination of additional partial cDNA sequences for 1I-4810 and 1I-4811, provided in SEQ ID NOS: 189 and 190, respectively.

Additional studies with prostate subtraction spike 2 resulted in the isolation of three more clones. Their sequences were determined as described above and compared to the most recent GenBank. All three clones were found to have homology to known genes, which are Cysteine-rich protein, KIAA0242, and KIAA0280 (SEQ ID NO: 317, 319, and 320, respectively). Further analysis of these clones by Synteni microarray (Synteni, Palo Alto, Calif.) demonstrated that all three clones were over-expressed in most prostate tumors and prostate BPH, as well as in the majority of normal prostate tissues tested, but low expression in all other normal tissues.

An additional subtraction was performed by subtracting a normal prostate cDNA library with normal pancreas cDNA (referred to as “prostate subtraction 3”). This led to the identification of six additional clones referred to as 1G-4761, 1G-4762, 1H-4766, 1H-4770, 1H-4771 and 1H-4772 (SEQ ID NOS: 93-98). Comparison of these sequences with those in the gene bank revealed no significant homologies to 1G-4761 and 1H-4771 (SEQ ID NOS: 93 and 97, respectively). Further analysis of the isolated clones led to the determination of extended cDNA sequences for 1G-4761, 1G-4762, 1H-4766 and 1H-4772 provided in SEQ ID NOS: 194-196, and 199, respectively, and to the determination of additional partial cDNA sequences for 1H-4770 and 1H-4771, provided in SEQ ID NOS: 197 and 198, respectively.

Subtraction of a prostate tumor cDNA library, prepared from a pool of polyA+ RNA from three prostate cancer patients, with a normal pancreas cDNA library (prostate subtraction 4) led to the identification of eight clones, referred to as 1D-4297, 1D-4309, 1D.1-4278, 1D-4288, 1D-4283, 1D-4304, 1D-4296 and 1D-4280 (SEQ ID NOS: 99-107). These sequences were compared to those in the gene bank as described above. No significant homologies were found to 1D-4283 and 1D-4304 (SEQ ID NOS: 103 and 104, respectively). Further analysis of the isolated clones led to the determination of extended cDNA sequences for 1D-4309, 1D.1-4278, 1D-4288, 1D-4283, 1D-4304, 1D-4296 and 1D-4280, provided in SEQ ID NOS: 200-206, respectively.

cDNA clones isolated in prostate subtraction 1 and prostate subtraction 2, described above, were colony PCR amplified and their mRNA expression levels in prostate tumor, normal prostate and in various other normal tissues were determined using microarray technology (Synteni, Palo Alto, Calif.). Briefly, the PCR amplification products were dotted onto slides in an array format, with each product occupying a unique location in the array. mRNA was extracted from the tissue sample to be tested, reverse transcribed, and fluorescent-labeled cDNA probes were generated. The microarrays were probed with the labeled cDNA probes, the slides scanned and fluorescence intensity was measured. This intensity correlates with the hybridization intensity. Two clones (referred to as P509S and P510S) were found to be over-expressed in prostate tumor and normal prostate and expressed at low levels in all other normal tissues tested (liver, pancreas, skin, bone marrow, brain, breast, adrenal gland, bladder, testes, salivary gland, large intestine, kidney, ovary, lung, spinal cord, skeletal muscle and colon). The determined cDNA sequences for P509S and P510S are provided in SEQ ID NO: 223 and 224, respectively. Comparison of these sequences with those in the gene bank as described above, revealed some homology to previously identified ESTs.

Additional, studies led to the isolation of the full-length cDNA sequence for P509S. This sequence is provided in SEQ ID NO: 332, with the corresponding predicted amino acid sequence being provided in SEQ ID NO: 339. Two variant full-length cDNA sequences for P510S are provided in SEQ ID NO: 535 and 536, with the corresponding predicted amino acid sequences being provided in SEQ ID NO: 537 and 538, respectively. Additional splice variants of P510S are provided in SEQ ID NO: 598 and 599.

The determined cDNA sequences for additional prostate-specific clones isolated during characterization of prostate specific cDNA libraries are provided in SEQ ID NO: 618-689, 691-697 and 709-772. Comparison of these sequences with those in the public databases revealed no significant homologies to any of these sequences.

EXAMPLE 2 Determination of Tissue Specificity of Prostate-Specific Polypeptides

Using gene specific primers, mRNA expression levels for the representative prostate-specific polypeptides F1-16, H1-1, J1-17 (also referred to as P502S), L1-12 (also referred to as P501S), F1-12 (also referred to as P504S) and N1-1862 (also referred to as P503S) were examined in a variety of normal and tumor tissues using RT-PCR.

Briefly, total RNA was extracted from a variety of normal and tumor tissues using Trizol reagent as described above. First strand synthesis was carried out using 1-2 μg of total RNA with SuperScript II reverse transcriptase (BRL Life Technologies) at 42° C. for one hour. The cDNA was then amplified by PCR with gene-specific primers. To ensure the semi-quantitative nature of the RT-PCR, β-actin was used as an internal control for each of the tissues examined. First, serial dilutions of the first strand cDNAs were prepared and RT-PCR assays were performed using β-actin specific primers. A dilution was then chosen that enabled the linear range amplification of the β-actin template and which was sensitive enough to reflect the differences in the initial copy numbers. Using these conditions, the β-actin levels were determined for each reverse transcription reaction from each tissue. DNA contamination was minimized by DNase treatment and by assuring a negative PCR result when using first strand cDNA that was prepared without adding reverse transcriptase.

mRNA Expression levels were examined in four different types of tumor tissue (prostate tumor from 2 patients, breast tumor from 3 patients, colon tumor, lung tumor), and sixteen different normal tissues, including prostate, colon, kidney, liver, lung, ovary, pancreas, skeletal muscle, skin, stomach, testes, bone marrow and brain. F1-16 was found to be expressed at high levels in prostate tumor tissue, colon tumor and normal prostate, and at lower levels in normal liver, skin and testes, with expression being undetectable in the other tissues examined. H1-1 was found to be expressed at high levels in prostate tumor, lung tumor, breast tumor, normal prostate, normal colon and normal brain, at much lower levels in normal lung, pancreas, skeletal muscle, skin, small intestine, bone marrow, and was not detected in the other tissues tested. J1-17 (P502S) and L1-12 (P501S) appear to be specifically over-expressed in prostate, with both genes being expressed at high levels in prostate tumor and normal prostate but at low to undetectable levels in all the other tissues examined. N1-1862 (P503S) was found to be over-expressed in 60% of prostate tumors and detectable in normal colon and kidney. The RT-PCR results thus indicate that F1-16, H1-1, J1-17 (P502S), N1-1862 (P503S) and L1-12 (P501S) are either prostate specific or are expressed at significantly elevated levels in prostate.

Further RT-PCR studies showed that F1-12 (P504S) is over-expressed in 60% of prostate tumors, detectable in normal kidney but not detectable in all other tissues tested. Similarly, R1-2330 was shown to be over-expressed in 40% of prostate tumors, detectable in normal kidney and liver, but not detectable in all other tissues tested. U1-3064 was found to be over-expressed in 60% of prostate tumors, and also expressed in breast and colon tumors, but was not detectable in normal tissues.

RT-PCR characterization of R1-2330, U1-3064 and 1D-4279 showed that these three antigens are over-expressed in prostate and/or prostate tumors.

Northern analysis with four prostate tumors, two normal prostate samples, two BPH prostates, and normal colon, kidney, liver, lung, pancrease, skeletal muscle, brain, stomach, testes, small intestine and bone marrow, showed that L1-12 (P501S) is over-expressed in prostate tumors and normal prostate, while being undetectable in other normal tissues tested. J1-17 (P502S) was detected in two prostate tumors and not in the other tissues tested. N1-1862 (P503S) was found to be over-expressed in three prostate tumors and to be expressed in normal prostate, colon and kidney, but not in other tissues tested. F1-12 (P504S) was found to be highly expressed in two prostate tumors and to be undetectable in all other tissues tested.

The microarray technology described above was used to determine the expression levels of representative antigens described herein in prostate tumor, breast tumor and the following normal tissues: prostate, liver, pancreas, skin, bone marrow, brain, breast, adrenal gland, bladder, testes, salivary gland, large intestine, kidney, ovary, lung, spinal cord, skeletal muscle and colon. L1-12 (P501S) was found to be over-expressed in normal prostate and prostate tumor, with some expression being detected in normal skeletal muscle. Both J1-12 and F1-12 (P504S) were found to be over-expressed in prostate tumor, with expression being lower or undetectable in all other tissues tested. N1-1862 (P503S) was found to be expressed at high levels in prostate tumor and normal prostate, and at low levels in normal large intestine and normal colon, with expression being undetectable in all other tissues tested. R1-2330 was found to be over-expressed in prostate tumor and normal prostate, and to be expressed at lower levels in all other tissues tested. 1D-4279 was found to be over-expressed in prostate tumor and normal prostate, expressed at lower levels in normal spinal cord, and to be undetectable in all other tissues tested.

Further microarray analysis to specifically address the extent to which P501S (SEQ ID NO: 110) was expressed in breast tumor revealed moderate over-expression not only in breast tumor, but also in metastatic breast tumor (2/31), with negligible to low expression in normal tissues. This data suggests that P501S may be over-expressed in various breast tumors as well as in prostate tumors.

The expression levels of 32 ESTs (expressed sequence tags) described by Vasmatzis et al. (Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 95:300-304, 1998) in a variety of tumor and normal tissues were examined by microarray technology as described above. Two of these clones (referred to as P1000C and P1001C) were found to be over-expressed in prostate tumor and normal prostate, and expressed at low to undetectable levels in all other tissues tested (normal aorta, thymus, resting and activated PBMC, epithelial cells, spinal cord, adrenal gland, fetal tissues, skin, salivary gland, large intestine, bone marrow, liver, lung, dendritic cells, stomach, lymph nodes, brain, heart, small intestine, skeletal muscle, colon and kidney. The determined cDNA sequences for P1000C and P1001C are provided in SEQ ID NO: 384 and 472, respectively. The sequence of P1001C was found to show some homology to the previously isolated Human mRNA for JM27 protein. No significant homologies were found to the sequence of P1000C.

The expression of the polypeptide encoded by the full length cDNA sequence for F1-12 (also referred to as P504S; SEQ ID NO: 108) was investigated by immunohistochemical analysis. Rabbit-anti-P504S polyclonal antibodies were generated against the full length P504S protein by standard techniques. Subsequent isolation and characterization of the polyclonal antibodies were also performed by techniques well known in the art. Immunohistochemical analysis showed that the P504S polypeptide was expressed in 100% of prostate carcinoma samples tested (n=5).

The rabbit-anti-P504S polyclonal antibody did not appear to label benign prostate cells with the same cytoplasmic granular staining, but rather with light nuclear staining. Analysis of normal tissues revealed that the encoded polypeptide was found to be expressed in some, but not all normal human tissues. Positive cytoplasmic staining with rabbit-anti-P504S polyclonal antibody was found in normal human kidney, liver, brain, colon and lung-associated macrophages, whereas heart and bone marrow were negative.

This data indicates that the P504S polypeptide is present in prostate cancer tissues, and that there are qualitative and quantitative differences in the staining between benign prostatic hyperplasia tissues and prostate cancer tissues, suggesting that this polypeptide may be detected selectively in prostate tumors and therefore be useful in the diagnosis of prostate cancer.

EXAMPLE 3 Isolation and Characterization of Prostate-Specific Polypeptides by PCR-Based Subtraction

A cDNA subtraction library, containing cDNA from normal prostate subtracted with ten other normal tissue cDNAs (brain, heart, kidney, liver, lung, ovary, placenta, skeletal muscle, spleen and thymus) and then submitted to a first round of PCR amplification, was purchased from Clontech. This library was subjected to a second round of PCR amplification, following the manufacturer's protocol. The resulting cDNA fragments were subcloned into the vector pT7 Blue T-vector (Novagen, Madison, Wis.) and transformed into XL-1 Blue MRF′ E. coli (Stratagene). DNA was isolated from independent clones and sequenced using a Perkin Elmer/Applied Biosystems Division Automated Sequencer Model 373A.

Fifty-nine positive clones were sequenced. Comparison of the DNA sequences of these clones with those in the gene bank, as described above, revealed no significant homologies to 25 of these clones, hereinafter referred to as P5, P8, P9, P18, P20, P30, P34, P36, P38, P39, P42, P49, P50, P53, P55, P60, P64, P65, P73, P75, P76, P79 and P84. The determined cDNA sequences for these clones are provided in SEQ ID NO: 41-45, 47-52 and 54-65, respectively. P29, P47, P68, P80 and P82 (SEQ ID NO: 46, 53 and 66-68, respectively) were found to show some degree of homology to previously identified DNA sequences. To the best of the inventors' knowledge, none of these sequences have been previously shown to be present in prostate.

Further studies employing the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 67 as a probe in standard full-length cloning methods, resulted in the isolation of three cDNA sequences which appear to be splice variants of P80 (also known as P704P). These sequences are provided in SEQ ID NO: 699-701.

Further studies using the PCR-based methodology described above resulted in the isolation of more than 180 additional clones, of which 23 clones were found to show no significant homologies to known sequences. The determined cDNA sequences for these clones are provided in SEQ ID NO: 115-123, 127, 131, 137, 145, 147-151, 153, 156-158 and 160. Twenty-three clones (SEQ ID NO: 124-126, 128-130, 132-136, 138-144, 146, 152, 154, 155 and 159) were found to show some homology to previously identified ESTs. An additional ten clones (SEQ ID NO: 161-170) were found to have some degree of homology to known genes. Larger cDNA clones containing the P20 sequence represent splice variants of a gene referred to as P703P. The determined DNA sequence for the variants referred to as DE1, DE13 and DE14 are provided in SEQ ID NOS: 171, 175 and 177, respectively, with the corresponding predicted amino acid sequences being provided in SEQ ID NO: 172, 176 and 178, respectively. The determined cDNA sequence for an extended spliced form of P703 is provided in SEQ ID NO: 225. The DNA sequences for the splice variants referred to as DE2 and DE6 are provided in SEQ ID NOS: 173 and 174, respectively.

mRNA Expression levels for representative clones in tumor tissues (prostate (n=5), breast (n=2), colon and lung) normal tissues (prostate (n=5), colon, kidney, liver, lung (n=2), ovary (n=2), skeletal muscle, skin, stomach, small intestine and brain), and activated and non-activated PBMC was determined by RT-PCR as described above. Expression was examined in one sample of each tissue type unless otherwise indicated.

P9 was found to be highly expressed in normal prostate and prostate tumor compared to all normal tissues tested except for normal colon which showed comparable expression. P20, a portion of the P703P gene, was found to be highly expressed in normal prostate and prostate tumor, compared to all twelve normal tissues tested. A modest increase in expression of P20 in breast tumor (n=2), colon tumor and lung tumor was seen compared to all normal tissues except lung (1 of 2). Increased expression of P18 was found in normal prostate, prostate tumor and breast tumor compared to other normal tissues except lung and stomach. A modest increase in expression of P5 was observed in normal prostate compared to most other normal tissues. However, some elevated expression was seen in normal lung and PBMC. Elevated expression of P5 was also observed in prostate tumors (2 of 5), breast tumor and one lung tumor sample. For P30, similar expression levels were seen in normal prostate and prostate tumor, compared to six of twelve other normal tissues tested. Increased expression was seen in breast tumors, one lung tumor sample and one colon tumor sample, and also in normal PBMC. P29 was found to be over-expressed in prostate tumor (5 of 5) and normal prostate (5 of 5) compared to the majority of normal tissues. However, substantial expression of P29 was observed in normal colon and normal lung (2 of 2). P80 was found to be over-expressed in prostate tumor (5 of 5) and normal prostate (5 of 5) compared to all other normal tissues tested, with increased expression also being seen in colon tumor.

Further studies resulted in the isolation of twelve additional clones, hereinafter referred to as 10-d8, 10-h10, 11-c8, 7-g6, 8-b5, 8-b6, 8-d4, 8-d9, 8-g3, 8-h11, 9-f12 and 9-f3. The determined DNA sequences for 10-d8, 10-h10, 11-c8, 8-d4, 8-d9, 8-h11, 9-f12 and 9-f3 are provided in SEQ ID NO: 207, 208, 209, 216, 217, 220, 221 and 222, respectively. The determined forward and reverse DNA sequences for 7-g6, 8-b5, 8-b6 and 8-g3 are provided in SEQ ID NO: 210 and 211; 212 and 213; 214 and 215; and 218 and 219, respectively. Comparison of these sequences with those in the gene bank revealed no significant homologies to the sequence of 9-f3. The clones 10-d8, 11-c8 and 8-h11 were found to show some homology to previously isolated ESTs, while 10-h10, 8-b5, 8-b6, 8-d4, 8-d9, 8-g3 and 9-f12 were found to show some homology to previously identified genes. Further characterization of 7-G6 and 8-G3 showed identity to the known genes PAP and PSA, respectively.

mRNA expression levels for these clones were determined using the micro-array technology described above. The clones 7-G6, 8-G3, 8-B5, 8-B6, 8-D4, 8-D9, 9-F3, 9-F12, 9-H3, 10-A2, 10-A4, 11-C9 and 1J-F2 were found to be over-expressed in prostate tumor and normal prostate, with expression in other tissues tested being low or undetectable. Increased expression of 8-F11 was seen in prostate tumor and normal prostate, bladder, skeletal muscle and colon. Increased expression of 10-H10 was seen in prostate tumor and normal prostate, bladder, lung, colon, brain and large intestine. Increased expression of 9-B1 was seen in prostate tumor, breast tumor, and normal prostate, salivary gland, large intestine and skin, with increased expression of 11-C8 being seen in prostate tumor, and normal prostate and large intestine.

An additional cDNA fragment derived from the PCR-based normal prostate subtraction, described above, was found to be prostate specific by both micro-array technology and RT-PCR. The determined cDNA sequence of this clone (referred to as 9-A11) is provided in SEQ ID NO: 226. Comparison of this sequence with those in the public databases revealed 99% identity to the known gene HOXB13.

Further studies led to the isolation of the clones 8-C6 and 8-H7. The determined cDNA sequences for these clones are provided in SEQ ID NO: 227 and 228, respectively. These sequences were found to show some homology to previously isolated ESTs.

PCR and hybridization-based methodologies were employed to obtain longer cDNA sequences for clone P20 (also referred to as P703P), yielding three additional cDNA fragments that progressively extend the 5′ end of the gene. These fragments, referred to as P703PDE5, P703P6.26, and P703PX-23 (SEQ ID NO: 326, 328 and 330, with the predicted corresponding amino acid sequences being provided in SEQ ID NO: 327, 329 and 331, respectively) contain additional 5′ sequence. P703PDE5 was recovered by screening of a cDNA library (#141-26) with a portion of P703P as a probe. P703P6.26 was recovered from a mixture of three prostate tumor cDNAs and P703PX_(—)23 was recovered from cDNA library (#438-48). Together, the additional sequences include all of the putative mature serine protease along with part of the putative signal sequence. The full-length cDNA sequence for P703P is provided in SEQ ID NO: 524, with the corresponding amino acid sequence being provided in SEQ ID NO: 525.

P703P was found to show some homology to previously identified proteases, such as thrombin. The thrombin receptor has been shown to be preferentially expressed in highly metastatic breast carcinoma cells and breast carcinoma biopsy samples. Introduction of thrombin receptor antisense cDNA has been shown to inhibit the invasion of metastatic breast carcinoma cells in culture. Antibodies against thrombin receptor inhibit thrombin receptor activation and thrombin-induced platelet activation. Furthermore, peptides that resemble the receptor's tethered ligand domain inhibit platelet aggregation by thrombin. P703P may play a role in prostate cancer through a protease-activated receptor on the cancer cell or on stromal cells. The potential trypsin-like protease activity of P703P may either activate a protease-activated receptor on the cancer cell membrane to promote tumorgenesis or activate a protease-activated receptor on the adjacent cells (such as stromal cells) to secrete growth factors and/or proteases (such as matrix metalloproteinases) that could promote tumor angiogenesis, invasion and metastasis. P703P may thus promote tumor progression and/or metastasis through the activation of protease-activated receptor. Polypeptides and antibodies that block the P703P-receptor interaction may therefore be usefully employed in the treatment of prostate cancer.

Further studies using a PCR-based subtraction library of a prostate tumor pool subtracted against a pool of normal tissues (referred to as JP: PCR subtraction) resulted in the isolation of thirteen additional clones, seven of which did not share any significant homology to known GenBank sequences. The determined cDNA sequences for these seven clones (P711P, P712P, novel 23, P774P, P775P, P710P and P768P) are provided in SEQ ID NO: 307-311, 313 and 315, respectively. The remaining six clones (SEQ ID NO: 316 and 321-325) were shown to share some homology to known genes. By microarray analysis, all thirteen clones showed three or more fold over-expression in prostate tissues, including prostate tumors, BPH and normal prostate as compared to normal non-prostate tissues. Clones P711P, P712P, novel 23 and P768P showed over-expression in most prostate tumors and BPH tissues tested (n=29), and in the majority of normal prostate tissues (n=4), but background to low expression levels in all normal tissues. Clones P774P, P775P and P710P showed comparatively lower expression and expression in fewer prostate tumors and BPH samples, with negative to low expression in normal prostate.

Further studies led to the isolation of an extended cDNA sequence for P712P (SEQ ID NO: 552). The amino acid sequences encoded by 16 predicted open reading frames present within the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 552 are provided in SEQ ID NO: 553-568.

The full-length cDNA for P711P was obtained by employing the partial sequence of SEQ ID NO: 307 to screen a prostate cDNA library. Specifically, a directionally cloned prostate cDNA library was prepared using standard techniques. One million colonies of this library were plated onto LB/Amp plates. Nylon membrane filters were used to lift these colonies, and the cDNAs which were picked up by these filters were denatured and cross-linked to the filters by UV light. The P711P cDNA fragment of SEQ ID NO: 307 was radio-labeled and used to hybridize with these filters. Positive clones were selected, and cDNAs were prepared and sequenced using an automatic Perkin Elmer/Applied Biosystems sequencer. The determined full-length sequence of P711P is provided in SEQ ID NO: 382, with the corresponding predicted amino acid sequence being provided in SEQ ID NO: 383.

Using PCR and hybridization-based methodologies, additional cDNA sequence information was derived for two clones described above, 11-C9 and 9-F3, herein after referred to as P707P and P714P, respectively (SEQ ID NO: 333 and 334). After comparison with the most recent GenBank, P707P was found to be a splice variant of the known gene HoxB13. In contrast, no significant homologies to P714P were found. Further studies employing the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 334 as a probe in standard full-length cloning methods, resulted in an extended cDNA sequence for P714P. This sequence is provided in SEQ ID NO: 698. This sequence was found to show some homology to the gene that encodes human ribosomal L23A protein.

Clones 8-B3, P89, P98, P130 and P201 (as disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/020,956, filed Feb. 9, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,261,562) were found to be contained within one contiguous sequence, referred to as P705P (SEQ ID NO: 335, with the predicted amino acid sequence provided in SEQ ID NO: 336), which was determined to be a splice variant of the known gene NKX 3.1.

Further studies on P775P resulted in the isolation of four additional sequences (SEQ ID NO: 473-476) which are all splice variants of the P775P gene. The sequence of SEQ ID NO: 474 was found to contain two open reading frames (ORFs). The predicted amino acid sequences encoded by these ORFs are provided in SEQ ID NO: 477 and 478. The cDNA sequence of SEQ ID NO: 475 was found to contain an ORF which encodes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 479. The cDNA sequence of SEQ ID NO: 473 was found to contain four ORFs. The predicted amino acid sequences encoded by these ORFs are provided in SEQ ID NO: 480-483. Additional splice variants of P775P are provided in SEQ ID NO: 593-597.

Subsequent studies led to the identification of a genomic region on chromosome 22q11.2, known as the Cat Eye Syndrome region, that contains the five prostate genes P704P, P712P, P774P, P775P and B305D. The relative location of each of these five genes within the genomic region is shown in FIG. 10. This region may therefore be associated with malignant tumors, and other potential tumor genes may be contained within this region. These studies also led to the identification of a potential open reading frame (ORF) for P775P (provided in SEQ ID NO: 533), which encodes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 534.

Comparison of the clone of SEQ ID NO: 325 (referred to as P558S) with sequences in the GenBank and GeneSeq DNA databases showed that P558S is identical to the prostate-specific transglutaminase gene, which is known to have two forms. The full-length sequences for the two forms are provided in SEQ ID NO: 773 and 774, with the corresponding amino acid sequences being provided in SEQ ID NO: 775 and 776, respectively. The cDNA sequence of SEQ ID NO: 774 has a 15 pair base insert, resulting in a 5 amino acid insert in the corresponding amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 776). This insert is not present in the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 773.

EXAMPLE 4 Synthesis of Polypeptides

Polypeptides may be synthesized on a Perkin Elmer/Applied Biosystems 430A peptide synthesizer using FMOC chemistry with HPTU (O-Benzotriazole-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate) activation. A Gly-Cys-Gly sequence may be attached to the amino terminus of the peptide to provide a method of conjugation, binding to an immobilized surface, or labeling of the peptide. Cleavage of the peptides from the solid support may be carried out using the following cleavage mixture: trifluoroacetic acid:ethanedithiol:thioanisole:water:phenol (40:1:2:2:3). After cleaving for 2 hours, the peptides may be precipitated in cold methyl-t-butyl-ether. The peptide pellets may then be dissolved in water containing 0.1% trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) and lyophilized prior to purification by C18 reverse phase HPLC. A gradient of 0%-60% acetonitrile (containing 0.1% TFA) in water (containing 0.1% TFA) may be used to elute the peptides. Following lyophilization of the pure fractions, the peptides may be characterized using electrospray or other types of mass spectrometry and by amino acid analysis.

EXAMPLE 5 Further Isolation and Characterization of Prostate-Specific Polypeptides by PCR-Based Subtraction

A cDNA library generated from prostate primary tumor mRNA as described above was subtracted with cDNA from normal prostate. The subtraction was performed using a PCR-based protocol (Clontech), which was modified to generate larger fragments. Within this protocol, tester and driver double stranded cDNA were separately digested with five restriction enzymes that recognize six-nucleotide restriction sites (MluI, MscI, PvuII, SalI and StuI). This digestion resulted in an average cDNA size of 600 bp, rather than the average size of 300 bp that results from digestion with RsaI according to the Clontech protocol. This modification did not affect the subtraction efficiency. Two tester populations were then created with different adapters, and the driver library remained without adapters.

The tester and driver libraries were then hybridized using excess driver cDNA. In the first hybridization step, driver was separately hybridized with each of the two tester cDNA populations. This resulted in populations of (a) unhybridized tester cDNAs, (b) tester cDNAs hybridized to other tester cDNAs, (c) tester cDNAs hybridized to driver cDNAs and (d) unhybridized driver cDNAs. The two separate hybridization reactions were then combined, and rehybridized in the presence of additional denatured driver cDNA. Following this second hybridization, in addition to populations (a) through (d), a fifth population (e) was generated in which tester cDNA with one adapter hybridized to tester cDNA with the second adapter. Accordingly, the second hybridization step resulted in enrichment of differentially expressed sequences which could be used as templates for PCR amplification with adaptor-specific primers.

The ends were then filled in, and PCR amplification was performed using adaptor-specific primers. Only population (e), which contained tester cDNA that did not hybridize to driver cDNA, was amplified exponentially. A second PCR amplification step was then performed, to reduce background and further enrich differentially expressed sequences.

This PCR-based subtraction technique normalizes differentially expressed cDNAs so that rare transcripts that are overexpressed in prostate tumor tissue may be recoverable. Such transcripts would be difficult to recover by traditional, subtraction methods.

In addition to genes known to be overexpressed in prostate tumor, seventy-seven further clones were identified. Sequences of these partial cDNAs are provided in SEQ ID NO: 29 to 305. Most of these clones had no significant homology to database sequences. Exceptions were JPTPN23 (SEQ ID NO: 231; similarity to pig valosin-containing protein), JPTPN30 (SEQ ID NO: 234; similarity to rat mRNA for proteasome subunit), JPTPN45 (SEQ ID NO: 243; similarity to rat norvegicus cytosolic NADP-dependent isocitrate dehydrogenase), JPTPN46 (SEQ ID NO: 244; similarity to human subclone H8 4 d4 DNA sequence), JP1D6 (SEQ ID NO: 265; similarity to G. gallus dynein light chain-A), JP8D6 (SEQ ID NO: 288; similarity to human BAC clone RG016J04), JP8F5 (SEQ ID NO: 289; similarity to human subclone H8 3 b5 DNA sequence), and JP8E9 (SEQ ID NO: 299; similarity to human Alu sequence).

Additional studies using the PCR-based subtraction library consisting of a prostate tumor pool subtracted against a normal prostate pool (referred to as PT-PN PCR subtraction) yielded three additional clones. Comparison of the cDNA sequences of these clones with the most recent release of GenBank revealed no significant homologies to the two clones referred to as P715P and P767P (SEQ ID NO: 312 and 314). The remaining clone was found to show some homology to the known gene KIAA0056 (SEQ ID NO: 318). Using microarray analysis to measure mRNA expression levels in various tissues, all three clones were found to be over-expressed in prostate tumors and BPH tissues. Specifically, clone P715P was over-expressed in most prostate tumors and BPH tissues by a factor of three or greater, with elevated expression seen in the majority of normal prostate samples and in fetal tissue, but negative to low expression in all other normal tissues. Clone P767P was over-expressed in several prostate tumors and BPH tissues, with moderate expression levels in half of the normal prostate samples, and background to low expression in all other normal tissues tested.

Further analysis, by microarray as described above, of the PT-PN PCR subtraction library and of a DNA subtraction library containing cDNA from prostate tumor subtracted with a pool of normal tissue cDNAs, led to the isolation of 27 additional clones (SEQ ID NO: 340-365 and 381) which were determined to be over-expressed in prostate tumor. The clones of SEQ ID NO: 341, 342, 345, 347, 348, 349, 351, 355-359, 361, 362 and 364 were also found to be expressed in normal prostate. Expression of all 26 clones in a variety of normal tissues was found to be low or undetectable, with the exception of P544S (SEQ ID NO: 356) which was found to be expressed in small intestine. Of the 26 clones, 11 (SEQ ID NO: 340-349 and 362) were found to show some homology to previously identified sequences. No significant homologies were found to the clones of SEQ ID NO: 350, 351, 353-361, and 363-365.

Comparison of the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 362 with sequences in the GenBank and GeneSeq DNA databases showed that this clone (referred to as P788P) is identical to GeneSeq Accession No. X27262, which encodes a protein found in the GeneSeq protein Accession No. Y00931. The full length cDNA sequence of P788P is shown in FIG. 12A (SEQ ID NO: 777), with the corresponding predicted amino acid being shown in FIG. 12B (SEQ ID NO: 778). Subsequently, a full-length cDNA sequence for P788P that contains polymorphisms not found in the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 779, was cloned multiple times by PCR amplification from cDNA prepared from several RNA templates from three individuals. This determined cDNA sequence of this polymorphic variant of P788P is provided in SEQ ID NO: 779, with the corresponding amino acid sequence being provided in SEQ ID NO: 780. The sequence of SEQ ID NO: 780 differs from that of SEQ ID NO: 778 by six amino acid residues.

Further studies on the clone of SEQ ID NO: 352 (referred to as P790P) led to the isolation of the full-length cDNA sequence of SEQ ID NO: 526. The corresponding predicted amino acid is provided in SEQ ID NO: 527. Data from two quantitative PCR experiments indicated that P790P is over-expressed in 11/15 tested prostate tumor samples and is expressed at low levels in spinal cord, with no expression being seen in all other normal samples tested. Data from further PCR experiments and microarray experiments showed over-expression in normal prostate and prostate tumor with little or no expression in other tissues tested. P790P was subsequently found to show significant homology to a previously identified G-protein coupled prostate tissue receptor.

Additional studies on the clone of SEQ ID NO: 354 (referred to as P776P) led to the isolation of an extended cDNA sequence, provided in SEQ ID NO: 569. The determined cDNA sequences of three additional splice variants of P776P are provided in SEQ ID NO: 570-572. The amino acid sequences encoded by two predicted open reading frames (ORFs) contained within SEQ ID NO: 570, one predicted ORF contained within SEQ ID NO: 571, and 11 predicted ORFs contained within SEQ ID NO: 569, are provided in SEQ ID NO: 573-586, respectively.

Comparison of the cDNA sequences for the clones P767P (SEQ ID NO: 314) and P777P (SEQ ID NO: 350) with sequences in the GenBank human EST database showed that the two clones matched many EST sequences in common, suggesting that P767P and P777P may represent the same gene. A DNA consensus sequence derived from a DNA sequence alignment of P767P, P777P and multiple EST clones is provided in SEQ ID NO: 587. The amino acid sequences encoded by three putative ORFs located within SEQ ID NO: 587 are provided in SEQ ID NO: 588-590.

EXAMPLE 6 Peptide Priming of Mice and Propagation of CTL Lines

6.1. This Example Illustrates the Preparation of a CTL Cell Line Specific for Cells Expressing the P502S Gene.

Mice expressing the transgene for human HLA A2 Kb (provided by Dr L. Sherman, The Scripps Research Institute, La Jolla, Calif.) were immunized with P2S#12 peptide (VLGWVAEL; SEQ ID NO: 306), which is derived from the P502S gene (also referred to herein as J1-17, SEQ ID NO: 8), as described by Theobald et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 92:11993-11997, 1995 with the following modifications. Mice were immunized with 100 μg of P2S#12 and 120 μg of an I-A^(b) binding peptide derived from hepatitis B Virus protein emulsified in incomplete Freund's adjuvant. Three weeks later these mice were sacrificed and using a nylon mesh single cell suspensions prepared. Cells were then resuspended at 6×10⁶ cells/ml in complete media (RPMI-1640; Gibco BRL, Gaithersburg, Md.) containing 10% FCS, 2 mM Glutamine (Gibco BRL), sodium pyruvate (Gibco BRL), non-essential amino acids (Gibco BRL), 2×10⁻⁵ M 2-mercaptoethanol, 50 U/ml penicillin and streptomycin, and cultured in the presence of irradiated (3000 rads) P2S#12-pulsed (5 mg/ml P2S#12 and 10 mg/ml β2-microglobulin) LPS blasts (A2 transgenic spleens cells cultured in the presence of 7 μg/ml dextran sulfate and 25 μg/ml LPS for 3 days). Six days later, cells (5×10⁵/ml) were restimulated with 2.5×10⁶/ml peptide pulsed irradiated (20,000 rads) EL4A2Kb cells (Sherman et al, Science 258:815-818, 1992) and 3×10⁶/ml A2 transgenic spleen feeder cells. Cells were cultured in the presence of 20 U/ml IL-2. Cells continued to be restimulated on a weekly basis as described, in preparation for cloning the line.

P2S#12 line was cloned by limiting dilution analysis with peptide pulsed EL4 A2Kb tumor cells (1×10⁴ cells/well) as stimulators and A2 transgenic spleen cells as feeders (5×10⁵ cells/well) grown in the presence of 30 U/ml IL-2. On day 14, cells were restimulated as before. On day 21, clones that were growing were isolated and maintained in culture. Several of these clones demonstrated significantly higher reactivity (lysis) against human fibroblasts (HLA A2Kb expressing) transduced with P502S than against control fibroblasts. An example is presented in FIG. 1.

This data indicates that P2S #12 represents a naturally processed epitope of the P502S protein that is expressed in the context of the human HLA A2Kb molecule.

6.2. This Example Illustrates the Preparation of Murine CTL Lines and CTL Clones Specific for Cells Expressing the P501S Gene.

This series of experiments were performed similarly to that described above. Mice were immunized with the P1S#10 peptide (SEQ ID NO: 337), which is derived from the P501S gene (also referred to herein as L1-12, SEQ ID NO: 110). The P1S#10 peptide was derived by analysis of the predicted polypeptide sequence for P501S for potential HLA-A2 binding sequences as defined by published HLA-A2 binding motifs (Parker, K C, et al, J. Immunol., 152:163, 1994). P1S#10 peptide was synthesized as described in Example 4, and empirically tested for HLA-A2 binding using a T cell based competition assay. Predicted A2 binding peptides were tested for their ability to compete HLA-A2 specific peptide presentation to an HLA-A2 restricted CTL clone (D150M58), which is specific for the HLA-A2 binding influenza matrix peptide fluM58. D150M58 CTL secretes TNF in response to self-presentation of peptide fluM58. In the competition assay, test peptides at 100-200 μg/ml were added to cultures of D150M58 CTL in order to bind HLA-A2 on the CTL. After thirty minutes, CTL cultured with test peptides, or control peptides, were tested for their antigen dose response to the fluM58 peptide in a standard TNF bioassay. As shown in FIG. 3, peptide P1S#10 competes HLA-A2 restricted presentation of fluM58, demonstrating that peptide P1S#10 binds HLA-A2.

Mice expressing the transgene for human HLA A2Kb were immunized as described by Theobald et al. (Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 92:11993-11997, 1995) with the following modifications. Mice were immunized with 62.5 μg of PIS #10 and 120 μg of an I-A^(b) binding peptide derived from Hepatitis B Virus protein emulsified in incomplete Freund's adjuvant. Three weeks later these mice were sacrificed and single cell suspensions prepared using a nylon mesh. Cells were then resuspended at 6×10⁶ cells/ml in complete media (as described above) and cultured in the presence of irradiated (3000 rads) P1S#10-pulsed (2 μg/ml P1S#10 and 10 mg/ml β2-microglobulin) LPS blasts (A2 transgenic spleens cells cultured in the presence of 7 μg/ml dextran sulfate and 25 μg/ml LPS for 3 days). Six days later cells (5×10⁵/ml) were restimulated with 2.5×10⁶/ml peptide-pulsed irradiated (20,000 rads) EL4A2Kb cells, as described above, and 3×10⁶/ml A2 transgenic spleen feeder cells. Cells were cultured in the presence of 20 U/ml IL-2. Cells were restimulated on a weekly basis in preparation for cloning. After three rounds of in vitro stimulations, one line was generated that recognized P1S#10-pulsed Jurkat A2 Kb targets and P501 S-transduced Jurkat targets as shown in FIG. 4.

A P1S#10-specific CTL line was cloned by limiting dilution analysis with peptide pulsed EL4 A2Kb tumor cells (1×10⁴ cells/well) as stimulators and A2 transgenic spleen cells as feeders (5×10⁵ cells/well) grown in the presence of 30 U/ml IL-2. On day 14, cells were restimulated as before. On day 21, viable clones were isolated and maintained in culture. As shown in FIG. 5, five of these clones demonstrated specific cytolytic reactivity against P501S-transduced Jurkat A2Kb targets. This data indicates that P1S#10 represents a naturally processed epitope of the P501S protein that is expressed in the context of the human HLA-A2.1 molecule.

EXAMPLE 7 Priming of CTL In Vivo Using Naked DNA Immunization with a Prostate Antigen

The prostate-specific antigen L1-12, as described above, is also referred to as P501S. HLA A2Kb Tg mice (provided by Dr L. Sherman, The Scripps Research Institute, La Jolla, Calif.) were immunized with 100 μg P501S in the vector VR1012 either intramuscularly or intradermally. The mice were immunized three times, with a two week interval between immunizations. Two weeks after the last immunization, immune spleen cells were cultured with Jurkat A2Kb-P501S transduced stimulator cells. CTL lines were stimulated weekly. After two weeks of in vitro stimulation, CTL activity was assessed against P501S transduced targets. Two out of 8 mice developed strong anti-P501S CTL responses. These results demonstrate that P501S contains at least one naturally processed HLA-A2-restricted CTL epitope.

EXAMPLE 8 Ability of Human T Cells to Recognize Prostate-Specific Polypeptides

This Example illustrates the ability of T cells specific for a prostate tumor polypeptide to recognize human tumor.

Human CD8⁺ T cells were primed in vitro to the P2S-12 peptide (SEQ ID NO: 306) derived from P502S (also referred to as J1-17) using dendritic cells according to the protocol of Van Tsai et al. (Critical Reviews in Immunology 18:65-75, 1998). The resulting CD8⁺ T cell microcultures were tested for their ability to recognize the P2S-12 peptide presented by autologous fibroblasts or fibroblasts which were transduced to express the P502S gene in a γ-interferon ELISPOT assay (see Lalvani et al., J. Exp. Med. 186:859-865, 1997). Briefly, titrating numbers of T cells were assayed in duplicate on 10⁴ fibroblasts in the presence of 3 μg/ml human β₂-microglobulin and 1 μg/ml P2S-12 peptide or control E75 peptide. In addition, T cells were simultaneously assayed on autologous fibroblasts transduced with the P502S gene or as a control, fibroblasts transduced with HER-2/neu. Prior to the assay, the fibroblasts were treated with 10 ng/ml γ-interferon for 48 hours to upregulate class I MHC expression. One of the microcultures (#5) demonstrated strong recognition of both peptide pulsed fibroblasts as well as transduced fibroblasts in a γ-interferon ELISPOT assay. FIG. 2A demonstrates that there was a strong increase in the number of γ-interferon spots with increasing numbers of T cells on fibroblasts pulsed with the P2S-12 peptide (solid bars) but not with the control E75 peptide (open bars). This shows the ability of these T cells to specifically recognize the P2S-12 peptide. As shown in FIG. 2B, this microculture also demonstrated an increase in the number of γ-interferon spots with increasing numbers of T cells on fibroblasts transduced to express the P502S gene but not the HER-2/neu gene. These results provide additional confirmatory evidence that the P2S-12 peptide is a naturally processed epitope of the P502S protein. Furthermore, this also demonstrates that there exists in the human T cell repertoire, high affinity T cells which are capable of recognizing this epitope. These T cells should also be capable of recognizing human tumors which express the P502S gene.

EXAMPLE 9 Elicitation of Prostate Antigen-Specific CTL Responses in Human Blood

This Example illustrates the ability of a prostate-specific antigen to elicit a CTL response in blood of normal humans.

Autologous dendritic cells (DC) were differentiated from monocyte cultures derived from PBMC of normal donors by growth for five days in RPMI medium containing 10% human serum, 50 ng/ml GMCSF and 30 ng/ml IL-4. Following culture, DC were infected overnight with recombinant P501S-expressing vaccinia virus at an M.O.I. of 5 and matured for 8 hours by the addition of 2 micrograms/ml CD40 ligand. Virus was inactivated by UV irradiation, CD8⁺ cells were isolated by positive selection using magnetic beads, and priming cultures were initiated in 24-well plates. Following five stimulation cycles using autologous fibroblasts retrovirally transduced to express P501S and CD80, CD8⁺ lines were identified that specifically produced interferon-gamma when stimulated with autologous P501S-transduced fibroblasts. The P501S-specific activity of cell line 3A-1 could be maintained following additional stimulation cycles on autologous B-LCL transduced with P501S. Line 3A-1 was shown to specifically recognize autologous B-LCL transduced to express P501S, but not EGFP-transduced autologous B-LCL, as measured by cytotoxicity assays (⁵¹Cr release) and interferon-gamma production (Interferon-gamma Elispot; see above and Lalvani et al., J. Exp. Med. 186:859-865, 1997). The results of these assays are presented in FIGS. 6A and 6B.

EXAMPLE 10 Identification of a Naturally Processed CTL Epitope Contained within a Prostate-Specific Antigen

The 9-mer peptide p5 (SEQ ID NO: 338) was derived from the P703P antigen (also referred to as P20). The p5 peptide is immunogenic in human HLA-A2 donors and is a naturally processed epitope. Antigen specific human CD8⁺ T cells can be primed following repeated in vitro stimulations with monocytes pulsed with p5 peptide. These CTL specifically recognize p5-pulsed and P703P-transduced target cells in both ELISPOT (as described above) and chromium release assays. Additionally, immunization of HLA-A2 Kb transgenic mice with p5 leads to the generation of CTL lines which recognize a variety of HLA-A2Kb or HLA-A2 transduced target cells expressing P703P.

Initial studies demonstrating that p5 is a naturally processed epitope were done using HLA-A2Kb transgenic mice. HLA-A2Kb transgenic mice were immunized subcutaneously in the footpad with 100 μg of p5 peptide together with 140 μg of hepatitis B virus core peptide (a Th peptide) in Freund's incomplete adjuvant. Three weeks post immunization, spleen cells from immunized mice were stimulated in vitro with peptide-pulsed LPS blasts. CTL activity was assessed by chromium release assay five days after primary in vitro stimulation. Retrovirally transduced cells expressing the control antigen P703P and HLA-A2Kb were used as targets. CTL lines that specifically recognized both p5-pulsed targets as well as P703P-expressing targets were identified.

Human in vitro priming experiments demonstrated that the p5 peptide is immunogenic in humans. Dendritic cells (DC) were differentiated from monocyte cultures derived from PBMC of normal human donors by culturing for five days in RPMI medium containing 10% human serum, 50 ng/ml human GM-CSF and 30 ng/ml human IL-4. Following culture, the DC were pulsed with 1 ug/ml p5 peptide and cultured with CD8⁺ T cell enriched PBMC. CTL lines were restimulated on a weekly basis with p5-pulsed monocytes. Five to six weeks after initiation of the CTL cultures, CTL recognition of p5-pulsed target cells was demonstrated. CTL were additionally shown to recognize human cells transduced to express P703P, demonstrating that p5 is a naturally processed epitope.

Studies identifying a further peptide epitope (referred to as peptide 4) derived from the prostate tumor-specific antigen P703P that is capable of being recognized by CD4 T cells on the surface of cells in the context of HLA class II molecules were carried out as follows. The amino acid sequence for peptide 4 is provided in SEQ ID NO: 781, with the corresponding cDNA sequence being provided in SEQ ID NO: 782.

Twenty 15-mer peptides overlapping by 10 amino acids and derived from the carboxy-terminal fragment of P703P were generated using standard procedures. Dendritic cells (DC) were derived from PBMC of a normal female donor using GM-CSF and IL-4 by standard protocols. CD4 T cells were generated from the same donor as the DC using MACS beads and negative selection. DC were pulsed overnight with pools of the 15-mer peptides, with each peptide at a final concentration of 0.25 microgram/ml. Pulsed DC were washed and plated at 1×10⁴ cells/well of 96-well V-bottom plates and purified CD4 T cells were added at 1×10⁵/well. Cultures were supplemented with 60 ng/ml IL-6 and 10 ng/ml IL-12 and incubated at 37° C. Cultures were restimulated as above on a weekly basis using DC generated and pulsed as above as antigen presenting cells, supplemented with 5 ng/ml IL-7 and 10 u/ml IL-2. Following 4 in vitro stimulation cycles, 96 lines (each line corresponding to one well) were tested for specific proliferation and cytokine production in response to the stimulating pools with an irrelevant pool of peptides derived from mammaglobin being used as a control.

One line (referred to as 1-F9) was identified from pool #1 that demonstrated specific proliferation (measured by 3H proliferation assays) and cytokine production (measured by interferon-gamma ELISA assays) in response to pool #1 of P703P peptides. This line was further tested for specific recognition of the peptide pool, specific recognition of individual peptides in the pool, and in HLA mismatch analyses to identify the relevant restricting allele. Line 1-F9 was found to specifically proliferate and produce interferon-gamma in response to peptide pool #1, and also to peptide 4 (SEQ ID NO: 781). Peptide 4 corresponds to amino acids 126-140 of SEQ ID NO: 327. Peptide titration experiments were conducted to assess the sensitivity of line 1-F9 for the specific peptide. The line was found to specifically respond to peptide 4 at concentrations as low as 0.25 ng/ml, indicating that the T cells are very sensitive and therefore likely to have high affinity for the epitope.

To determine the HLA restriction of the P703P response, a panel of antigen presenting cells (APC) was generated that was partially matched with the donor used to generate the T cells. The APC were pulsed with the peptide and used in proliferation and cytokine assays together with line 1-F9. APC matched with the donor at HLA-DRB0701 and HLA-DQB02 alleles were able to present the peptide to the T cells, indicating that the P703P-specific response is restricted to one of these alleles.

In further studies, twenty-four 15-mer peptides overlapping by 10 amino acids and derived from the N-terminal fragment of P703P (corresponding to amino acids 27-154 of SEQ ID NO: 525) were generated by standard procedures and their ability to be recognized by CD4 cells was determined essentially as described above. DC were pulsed overnight with pools of the peptides with each peptide at a final concentration of 10 microgram/ml. A large number of individual CD4 T cell lines (65/480) demonstrated significant proliferation and cytokine release (IFN-gamma) in response to the P703P peptide pools but not to a control peptide pool. The CD4 T cell lines which demonstrated specific activity were restimulated on the appropriate pool of P703P peptides and reassayed on the individual peptides of each pool as well as a peptide dose titration of the pool of peptides in a IFN-gamma release assay and in a proliferation assay.

Sixteen immunogenic peptides were recognized by the T cells from the entire set of peptide antigens tested. The amino acid sequences of these peptides are provided in SEQ ID NO: 799-814, with the corresponding cDNA sequences being provided in SEQ ID NO: 783-798, respectively. In some cases the peptide reactivity of the T cell line could be mapped to a single peptide, however some could be mapped to more than one peptide in each pool. Those CD4 T cell lines that displayed a representative pattern of recognition from each peptide pool with a reasonable affinity for peptide were chosen for further analysis (I-1A, −6A; II-4C, −5E; III-6E, IV-4B, −3F, −9B, −10F, V-5B, −4D, and −10F). These CD4 T cells lines were restimulated on the appropriate individual peptide and reassayed on autologous DC pulsed with a truncated form of recombinant P703P protein made in E. coli (a.a. 96-254 of SEQ ID NO: 525), full-length P703P made in the baculovirus expression system, and a fusion between influenza virus NS1 and P703P made in E. coli. Of the T cell lines tested, line I-1A recognized specifically the truncated form of P703P (E. coli) but no other recombinant form of P703P. This line also recognized the peptide used to elicit the T cells. Line 2-4C recognized the truncated form of P703P (E. coli) and the full length form of P703P made in baculovirus, as well as peptide. The remaining T cell lines tested were either peptide-specific only (II-5E, II-6F, IV-4B, IV-3F, IV-9B, IV-10F, V-5B and V-4D) or were non-responsive to any antigen tested (V-10F). These results demonstrate that the peptide sequence RPLLANDLMLIKLDE (SEQ ID NO: 814; corresponding to a.a. 110-124 of SEQ ID NO: 525) recognized by the T cell line I-1A, and the peptide sequences SVSESDTIRSISIAS (SEQ ID NO: 811; corresponding to a.a. 125-139 of SEQ ID NO: 525) and ISIASQCPTAGNSCL (SEQ ID NO: 810; corresponding to a.a. 135-149 of SEQ ID NO: 525) recognized by the T cell line II-4C may be naturally processed epitopes of the P703P protein.

EXAMPLE 11 Expression of a Breast Tumor-Derived Antigen in Prostate

Isolation of the antigen B305D from breast tumor by differential display is described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/700,014, filed Aug. 20, 1996, now abandoned. Several different splice forms of this antigen were isolated. The determined cDNA sequences for these splice forms are provided in SEQ ID NO: 366-375, with the predicted amino acid sequences corresponding to the sequences of SEQ ID NO: 292, 298 and 301-303 being provided in SEQ ID NO: 299-306, respectively. In further studies, a splice variant of the cDNA sequence of SEQ ID NO: 366 was isolated which was found to contain an additional guanine residue at position 884 (SEQ ID NO: 530), leading to a frameshift in the open reading frame. The determined DNA sequence of this ORF is provided in SEQ ID NO: 531. This frameshift generates a protein sequence (provided in SEQ ID NO: 532) of 293 amino acids that contains the C-terminal domain common to the other isoforms of B305D but that differs in the N-terminal region.

The expression levels of B305D in a variety of tumor and normal tissues were examined by real time PCR and by Northern analysis. The results indicated that B305D is highly expressed in breast tumor, prostate tumor, normal prostate and normal testes, with expression being low or undetectable in all other tissues examined (colon tumor, lung tumor, ovary tumor, and normal bone marrow, colon, kidney, liver, lung, ovary, skin, small intestine, stomach). Using real-time PCR on a panel of prostate tumors, expression of B305D in prostate tumors was shown to increase with increasing Gleason grade, demonstrating that expression of B305D increases as prostate cancer progresses.

EXAMPLE 12 Generation of Human CTL In Vitro Using Whole Gene Priming and Stimulation Techniques with Prostate-Specific Antigen

Using in vitro whole-gene priming with P501S-vaccinia infected DC (see, for example, Yee et al, The Journal of Immunology, 157(9):4079-86, 1996), human CTL lines were derived that specifically recognize autologous fibroblasts transduced with P501S (also known as L1-12), as determined by interferon-γ ELISPOT analysis as described above. Using a panel of HLA-mismatched B-LCL lines transduced with P501S, these CTL lines were shown to be likely restricted to HLAB class I allele. Specifically, dendritic cells (DC) were differentiated from monocyte cultures derived from PBMC of normal human donors by growing for five days in RPMI medium containing 10% human serum, 50 ng/ml human GM-CSF and 30 ng/ml human IL-4. Following culture, DC were infected overnight with recombinant P501S vaccinia virus at a multiplicity of infection (M.O.I) of five, and matured overnight by the addition of 3 μg/ml CD40 ligand. Virus was inactivated by UV irradiation. CD8+ T cells were isolated using a magnetic bead system, and priming cultures were initiated using standard culture techniques. Cultures were restimulated every 7-10 days using autologous primary fibroblasts retrovirally transduced with P501S and CD80. Following four stimulation cycles, CD8+ T cell lines were identified that specifically produced interferon-γ when stimulated with P501S and CD80-transduced autologous fibroblasts. A panel of HLA-mismatched B-LCL lines transduced with P501S were generated to define the restriction allele of the response. By measuring interferon-γ in an ELISPOT assay, the P501S specific response was shown to be likely restricted by HLA B alleles. These results demonstrate that a CD8+ CTL response to P501S can be elicited.

To identify the epitope(s) recognized, cDNA encoding P501S was fragmented by various restriction digests, and sub-cloned into the retroviral expression vector pBIB-KS. Retroviral supernatants were generated by transfection of the helper packaging line Phoenix-Ampho. Supernatants were then used to transduce Jurkat/A2Kb cells for CTL screening. CTL were screened in IFN-gamma ELISPOT assays against these A2Kb targets transduced with the “library” of P501S fragments. Initial positive fragments P501S/H3 and P501S/F2 were sequenced and found to encode amino acids 106-553 and amino acids 136-547, respectively, of SEQ ID NO: 113. A truncation of H3 was made to encode amino acid residues 106-351 of SEQ ID NO: 113, which was unable to stimulate the CTL, thus localizing the epitope to amino acid residues 351-547. Additional fragments encoding amino acids 1-472 (Fragment A) and amino acids 1-351 (Fragment B) were also constructed. Fragment A but not Fragment B stimulated the CTL thus localizing the epitope to amino acid residues 351-472. Overlapping 20-mer and 18-mer peptides representing this region were tested by pulsing Jurkat/A2Kb cells versus CTL in an IFN-gamma assay. Only peptides P501S-369(20) and P501S-369(18) stimulated the CTL. Nine-mer and 10-mer peptides representing this region were synthesized and similarly tested. Peptide P501S-370 (SEQ ID NO: 539) was the minimal 9-mer giving a strong response. Peptide P501S-376 (SEQ ID NO: 540) also gave a weak response, suggesting that it might represent a cross-reactive epitope.

In subsequent studies, the ability of primary human B cells transduced with P501S to prime MHC class I-restricted, P501S-specific, autologous CD8 T cells was examined. Primary B cells were derived from PBMC of a homozygous HLA-A2 donor by culture in CD40 ligand and IL-4, transduced at high frequency with recombinant P501S in the vector pBIB, and selected with blastocidin-S. For in vitro priming, purified CD8+ T cells were cultured with autologous CD40 ligand+IL-4 derived, P501S-transduced B cells in a 96-well microculture format. These CTL microcultures were re-stimulated with P501S-transduced B cells and then assayed for specificity. Following this initial screen, microcultures with significant signal above background were cloned on autologous EBV-transformed B cells (BLCL), also transduced with P501S. Using IFN-gamma ELISPOT for detection, several of these CD8 T cell clones were found to be specific for P501S, as demonstrated by reactivity to BLCL/P501S but not BLCL transduced with control antigen. It was further demonstrated that the anti-P501S CD8 T cell specificity is HLA-A2-restricted. First, antibody blocking experiments with anti-HLA-A,B,C monoclonal antibody (W6.32), anti-HLA-B,C monoclonal antibody (B1.23.2) and a control monoclonal antibody showed that only the anti-HLA-A,B,C antibody blocked recognition of P501S-expressing autologous BLCL. Secondly, the anti-P501S CTL also recognized an HLA-A2 matched, heterologous BLCL transduced with P501S, but not the corresponding EGFP transduced control BLCL.

EXAMPLE 13 Identification of Prostate-Specific Antigens by Microarray Analysis

This Example describes the isolation of certain prostate-specific polypeptides from a prostate tumor cDNA library.

A human prostate tumor cDNA expression library as described above was screened using microarray analysis to identify clones that display at least a three fold over-expression in prostate tumor and/or normal prostate tissue, as compared to non-prostate normal tissues (not including testis). 372 clones were identified, and 319 were successfully sequenced. Table I presents a summary of these clones, which are shown in SEQ ID NOs:385-400. Of these sequences SEQ ID NOs:386, 389, 390 and 392 correspond to novel genes, and SEQ ID NOs: 393 and 396 correspond to previously identified sequences. The others (SEQ ID NOs:385, 387, 388, 391, 394, 395 and 397-400) correspond to known sequences, as shown in Table I.

TABLE I Summary of Prostate Tumor Antigens Previously Known Genes Identified Genes Novel Genes T-cell gamma chain P504S 23379 (SEQ ID NO:389) Kallikrein P1000C 23399 (SEQ ID NO:392) Vector P501S 23320 (SEQ ID NO:386) CGI-82 protein mRNA P503S 23381 (SEQ ID (23319; SEQ ID NO:390) NO:385) PSA P510S ALd. 6 Dehyd. P784P L-iditol-2 dehydrogenase P502S (23376; SEQ ID NO:388) Ets transcription factor P706P PDEF (22672; SEQ ID NO:398) hTGR (22678; SEQ ID 19142.2, bangur.seq NO:399) (22621; SEQ ID NO:396) KIAA0295 (22685; SEQ 5566.1 Wang ID NO:400) (23404; SEQ ID NO:393) Prostatic Acid P712P Phosphatase (22655; SEQ ID NO:397) transglutaminase (22611; P778P SEQ ID NO:395) HDLBP (23508; SEQ ID NO:394) CGI-69 Protein (23367; SEQ ID NO:387) KIAA0122 (23383; SEQ ID NO:391) TEEG

CGI-82 showed 4.06 fold over-expression in prostate tissues as compared to other normal tissues tested. It was over-expressed in 43% of prostate tumors, 25% normal prostate, not detected in other normal tissues tested. L-iditol-2 dehydrogenase showed 4.94 fold over-expression in prostate tissues as compared to other normal tissues tested. It was over-expressed in 90% of prostate tumors, 100% of normal prostate, and not detected in other normal tissues tested. Ets transcription factor PDEF showed 5.55 fold over-expression in prostate tissues as compared to other normal tissues tested. It was over-expressed in 47% prostate tumors, 25% normal prostate and not detected in other normal tissues tested. hTGR1 showed 9.11 fold over-expression in prostate tissues as compared to other normal tissues tested. It was over-expressed in 63% of prostate tumors and is not detected in normal tissues tested including normal prostate. KIAA0295 showed 5.59 fold over-expression in prostate tissues as compared to other normal tissues tested. It was over-expressed in 47% of prostate tumors, low to undetectable in normal tissues tested including normal prostate tissues. Prostatic acid phosphatase showed 9.14 fold over-expression in prostate tissues as compared to other normal tissues tested. It was over-expressed in 67% of prostate tumors, 50% of normal prostate, and not detected in other normal tissues tested. Transglutaminase showed 14.84 fold over-expression in prostate tissues as compared to other normal tissues tested. It was over-expressed in 30% of prostate tumors, 50% of normal prostate, and is not detected in other normal tissues tested. High density lipoprotein binding protein (HDLBP) showed 28.06 fold over-expression in prostate tissues as compared to other normal tissues tested. It was over-expressed in 97% of prostate tumors, 75% of normal prostate, and is undetectable in all other normal tissues tested. CGI-69 showed 3.56 fold over-expression in prostate tissues as compared to other normal tissues tested. It is a low abundant gene, detected in more than 90% of prostate tumors, and in 75% normal prostate tissues. The expression of this gene in normal tissues was very low. KIAA0122 showed 4.24 fold over-expression in prostate tissues as compared to other normal tissues tested. It was over-expressed in 57% of prostate tumors, it was undetectable in all normal tissues tested including normal prostate tissues. 19142.2 bangur showed 23.25 fold over-expression in prostate tissues as compared to other normal tissues tested. It was over-expressed in 97% of prostate tumors and 100% of normal prostate. It was undetectable in other normal tissues tested. 5566.1 Wang showed 3.31 fold over-expression in prostate tissues as compared to other normal tissues tested. It was over-expressed in 97% of prostate tumors, 75% normal prostate and was also over-expressed in normal bone marrow, pancreas, and activated PBMC. Novel clone 23379 (also referred to as P553S) showed 4.86 fold over-expression in prostate tissues as compared to other normal tissues tested. It was detectable in 97% of prostate tumors and 75% normal prostate and is undetectable in all other normal tissues tested. Novel clone 23399 showed 4.09 fold over-expression in prostate tissues as compared to other normal tissues tested. It was over-expressed in 27% of prostate tumors and was undetectable in all normal tissues tested including normal prostate tissues. Novel clone 23320 showed 3.15 fold over-expression in prostate tissues as compared to other normal tissues tested. It was detectable in all prostate tumors and 50% of normal prostate tissues. It was also expressed in normal colon and trachea. Other normal tissues do not express this gene at high level.

Subsequent full-length cloning studies on P553S, using standard techniques, revealed that this clone is an incomplete spliced form of P501S. The determined cDNA sequences for four splice variants of P553S are provided in SEQ ID NO: 702-705. An amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID NO: 705 is provided in SEQ ID NO: 706. The cDNA sequence of SEQ ID NO: 702 was found to contain two open reading frames (ORFs). The amino acid sequences encoded by these two ORFs are provided in SEQ ID NO: 707 and 708.

EXAMPLE 14 Identification of Prostate-Specific Antigens by Electronic Subtraction

This Example describes the use of an electronic subtraction technique to identify prostate-specific antigens.

Potential prostate-specific genes present in the GenBank human EST database were identified by electronic subtraction (similar to that described by Vasmatizis et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 95:300-304, 1998). The sequences of EST clones (43,482) derived from various prostate libraries were obtained from the GenBank public human EST database. Each prostate EST sequence was used as a query sequence in a BLASTN (National Center for Biotechnology Information) search against the human EST database. All matches considered identical (length of matching sequence >100 base pairs, density of identical matches over this region >70%) were grouped (aligned) together in a cluster. Clusters containing more than 200 ESTs were discarded since they probably represented repetitive elements or highly expressed genes such as those for ribosomal proteins. If two or more clusters shared common ESTs, those clusters were grouped together into a “supercluster,” resulting in 4,345 prostate superclusters.

Records for the 479 human cDNA libraries represented in the GenBank release were downloaded to create a database of these cDNA library records. These 479 cDNA libraries were grouped into three groups: Plus (normal prostate and prostate tumor libraries, and breast cell line libraries, in which expression was desired), Minus (libraries from other normal adult tissues, in which expression was not desirable), and Other (libraries from fetal tissue, infant tissue, tissues found only in women, non-prostate tumors and cell lines other than prostate cell lines, in which expression was considered to be irrelevant). A summary of these library groups is presented in Table II.

TABLE II Prostate cDNA Libraries and ESTs Library # of Libraries # of ESTs Plus 25 43,482 Normal 11 18,875 Tumor 11 21,769 Cell lines 3  2,838 Minus 166 Other 287

Each supercluster was analyzed in terms of the ESTs within the supercluster. The tissue source of each EST clone was noted and used to classify the superclusters into four groups: Type 1-EST clones found in the Plus group libraries only; no expression detected in Minus or Other group libraries; Type 2-EST clones derived from the Plus and Other group libraries only; no expression detected in the Minus group; Type 3-EST clones derived from the Plus, Minus and Other group libraries, but the number of ESTs derived from the Plus group is higher than in either the Minus or Other groups; and Type 4-EST clones derived from Plus, Minus and Other group libraries, but the number derived from the Plus group is higher than the number derived from the Minus group. This analysis identified 4,345 breast clusters (see Table III). From these clusters, 3,172 EST clones were ordered from Research Genetics, Inc., and were received as frozen glycerol stocks in 96-well plates.

TABLE III Prostate Cluster Summary # of # of ESTs Type Superclusters Ordered 1  688  677 2 2899 2484 3  85  11 4  673   0 Total 4345 3172

The EST clone insert were PCR-amplified using amino-linked PCR primers for Synteni microarray analysis. When more than one PCR product was obtained for a particular clone, the PCR product was not used for expression analysis. In total, 2,528 clones from the electronic subtraction method were analyzed by microarray analysis to identify electronic subtraction breast clones that had high levels of tumor vs. normal tissue mRNA. Such screens were performed using a Synteni (Palo Alto, Calif.) microarray, according to the manufacturer's instructions (and essentially as described by Schena et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 93:10614-10619, 1996 and Heller et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94:2150-2155, 1997). Within these analyses, the clones were arrayed on the chip, which was then probed with fluorescent probes generated from normal and tumor prostate cDNA, as well as various other normal tissues. The slides were scanned and the fluorescence intensity was measured.

Clones with an expression ratio greater than 3 (i.e., the level in prostate tumor and normal prostate mRNA was at least three times the level in other normal tissue mRNA) were identified as prostate tumor-specific sequences (Table IV). The sequences of these clones are provided in SEQ ID NO: 401-453, with certain novel sequences shown in SEQ ID NO: 407, 413, 416-419, 422, 426, 427 and 450.

TABLE IV Prostate-tumor Specific Clones Sequence SEQ ID NO. Designation Comments 401 22545 previously identified P1000C 402 22547 previously identified P704P 403 22548 known 404 22550 known 405 22551 PSA 406 22552 prostate secretory protein 94 407 22553 novel 408 22558 previously identified P509S 409 22562 glandular kallikrein 410 22565 previously identified P1000C 411 22567 PAP 412 22568 B1006C (breast tumor antigen) 413 22570 novel 414 22571 PSA 415 22572 previously identified P706P 416 22573 novel 417 22574 novel 418 22575 novel 419 22580 novel 420 22581 PAP 421 22582 prostatic secretory protein 94 422 22583 novel 423 22584 prostatic secretory protein 94 424 22585 prostatic secretory protein 94 425 22586 known 426 22587 novel 427 22588 novel 428 22589 PAP 429 22590 known 430 22591 PSA 431 22592 known 432 22593 Previously identified P777P 433 22594 T cell receptor gamma chain 434 22595 Previously identified P705P 435 22596 Previously identified P707P 436 22847 PAP 437 22848 known 438 22849 prostatic secretory protein 57 439 22851 PAP 440 22852 PAP 441 22853 PAP 442 22854 previously identified P509S 443 22855 previously identified P705P 444 22856 previously identified P774P 445 22857 PSA 446 23601 previously identified P777P 447 23602 PSA 448 23605 PSA 449 23606 PSA 450 23612 novel 451 23614 PSA 452 23618 previously identified P1000C 453 23622 previously identified P705P

Further studies on the clone of SEQ ID NO: 407 (also referred to as P1020C) led to the isolation of an extended cDNA sequence provided in SEQ ID NO: 591. This extended cDNA sequence was found to contain an open reading frame that encodes the predicted amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 592. The P1020C cDNA and amino acid sequences were found to show some similarity to the human endogenous retroviral HERV-K pol gene and protein.

EXAMPLE 15 Further Identification of Prostate-Specific Antigens by Microarray Analysis

This Example describes the isolation of additional prostate-specific polypeptides from a prostate tumor cDNA library.

A human prostate tumor cDNA expression library as described above was screened using microarray analysis to identify clones that display at least a three fold over-expression in prostate tumor and/or normal prostate tissue, as compared to non-prostate normal tissues (not including testis). 142 clones were identified and sequenced. Certain of these clones are shown in SEQ ID NO: 454-467. Of these sequences, SEQ ID NO: 459-461 represent novel genes. The others (SEQ ID NO: 454-458 and 461-467) correspond to known sequences.

EXAMPLE 16 Further Characterization of Prostate-Specific Antigen P710P

This Example describes the full length cloning of P710P.

The prostate cDNA library described above was screened with the P710P fragment described above. One million colonies were plated on LB/Ampicillin plates. Nylon membrane filters were used to lift these colonies, and the cDNAs picked up by these filters were then denatured and cross-linked to the filters by UV light. The P710P fragment was radiolabeled and used to hybridize with the filters. Positive cDNA clones were selected and their cDNAs recovered and sequenced by an automatic Perkin Elmer/Applied Biosystems Division Sequencer. Four sequences were obtained, and are presented in SEQ ID NO: 468-471. These sequences appear to represent different splice variants of the P710P gene. Subsequent comparison of the cDNA sequences of P710P with those in Genbank releaved homology to the DD3 gene (Genbank accession numbers AF103907 & AF103908). The cDNA sequence of DD3 is provided in SEQ ID NO: 690.

EXAMPLE 17 Protein Expression of the Prostate-Specific Antigen P501S

This example describes the expression and purification of the prostate-specific antigen P501S in E. coli, baculovirus and mammalian cells.

A) Expression in E. coli

Expression of the full-length form of P501S was attempted by first cloning P501S without the leader sequence (amino acids 36-553 of SEQ ID NO: 113) downstream of the first 30 amino acids of the M. tuberculosis antigen Ra12 (SEQ ID NO: 484) in pET17b. Specifically, P501S DNA was used to perform PCR using the primers AW025 (SEQ ID NO: 485) and AW003 (SEQ ID NO: 486). AW025 is a sense cloning primer that contains a HindIII site. AW003 is an antisense cloning primer that contains an EcoRI site. DNA amplification was performed using 5 μl 10×Pfu buffer, 1 μl 20 mM dNTPs, 1 μl each of the PCR primers at 10 μM concentration, 40 μl water, 1 μl Pfu DNA polymerase (Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif.) and 1 μl DNA at 100 ng/μl. Denaturation at 95° C. was performed for 30 sec, followed by 10 cycles of 95° C. for 30 sec, 60° C. for 1 min and by 72° C. for 3 min. 20 cycles of 95° C. for 30 sec, 65° C. for 1 min and by 72° C. for 3 min, and lastly by 1 cycle of 72° C. for 10 min. The PCR product was cloned to Ra12 m/pET17b using HindIII and EcoRI. The sequence of the resulting fusion construct (referred to as Ra12-P501S-F) was confirmed by DNA sequencing.

The fusion construct was transformed into BL21(DE3)pLysE, pLysS and CodonPlus E. coli (Stratagene) and grown overnight in LB broth with kanamycin. The resulting culture was induced with IPTG. Protein was transferred to PVDF membrane and blocked with 5% non-fat milk (in PBS-Tween buffer), washed three times and incubated with mouse anti-His tag antibody (Clontech) for 1 hour. The membrane was washed 3 times and probed with HRP-Protein A (Zymed) for 30 min. Finally, the membrane was washed 3 times and developed with ECL (Amersham). No expression was detected by Western blot. Similarly, no expression was detected by Western blot when the Ra12-P501S-F fusion was used for expression in BL21CodonPlus by CE6 phage (Invitrogen).

An N-terminal fragment of P501S (amino acids 36-325 of SEQ ID NO: 113) was cloned down-stream of the first 30 amino acids of the M. tuberculosis antigen Ra12 in pET17b as follows. P501S DNA was used to perform PCR using the primers AW025 (SEQ ID NO: 485) and AW027 (SEQ ID NO: 487). AW027 is an antisense cloning primer that contains an EcoRI site and a stop codon. DNA amplification was performed essentially as described above. The resulting PCR product was cloned to Ra12 in pET17b at the HindIII and EcoRI sites. The fusion construct (referred to as Ra12-P501S-N) was confirmed by DNA sequencing.

The Ra12-P501S-N fusion construct was used for expression in BL21(DE3)pLysE, pLysS and CodonPlus, essentially as described above. Using Western blot analysis, protein bands were observed at the expected molecular weight of 36 kDa. Some high molecular weight bands were also observed, probably due to aggregation of the recombinant protein. No expression was detected by Western blot when the Ra12-P501S-F fusion was used for expression in BL21CodonPlus by CE6 phage.

A fusion construct comprising a C-terminal portion of P501S (amino acids 257-553 of SEQ ID NO: 113) located down-stream of the first 30 amino acids of the M. tuberculosis antigen Ra12 (SEQ ID NO: 484) was prepared as follows. P501S DNA was used to perform PCR using the primers AW026 (SEQ ID NO: 488) and AW003 (SEQ ID NO: 486). AW026 is a sense cloning primer that contains a HindIII site. DNA amplification was performed essentially as described above. The resulting PCR product was cloned to Ra12 in pET17b at the HindIII and EcoRI sites. The sequence for the fusion construct (referred to as Ra12-P501S-C) was confirmed.

The Ra12-P501S-C fusion construct was used for expression in BL21(DE3)pLysE, pLysS and CodonPlus, as described above. A small amount of protein was detected by Western blot, with some molecular weight aggregates also being observed. Expression was also detected by Western blot when the Ra12-P501S-C fusion was used for expression in BL21CodonPlus induced by CE6 phage.

B) Expression of P501S in Baculovirus

The Bac-to-Bac baculovirus expression system (BRL Life Technologies, Inc.) was used to express P501S protein in insect cells. Full-length P501S (SEQ ID NO: 113) was amplified by PCR and cloned into the XbaI site of the donor plasmid pFastBacI. The recombinant bacmid and baculovirus were prepared according to the manufacturer's instructions. The recombinant baculovirus was amplified in Sf9 cells and the high titer viral stocks were utilized to infect High Five cells (Invitrogen) to make the recombinant protein. The identity of the full-length protein was confirmed by N-terminal sequencing of the recombinant protein and by Western blot analysis (FIG. 7). Specifically, 0.6 million High Five cells in 6-well plates were infected with either the unrelated control virus BV/ECD_PD (lane 2), with recombinant baculovirus for P501S at different amounts or MOIs (lanes 4-8), or were uninfected (lane 3). Cell lysates were run on SDS-PAGE under reducing conditions and analyzed by Western blot with the anti-P501S monoclonal antibody P501S-10E3-G4D3 (prepared as described below). Lane 1 is the biotinylated protein molecular weight marker (BioLabs).

The localization of recombinant P501S in the insect cells was investigated as follows. The insect cells overexpressing P501S were fractionated into fractions of nucleus, mitochondria, membrane and cytosol. Equal amounts of protein from each fraction were analyzed by Western blot with a monoclonal antibody against P501S. Due to the scheme of fractionation, both nucleus and mitochondria fractions contain some plasma membrane components. However, the membrane fraction is basically free from mitochondria and nucleus. P501S was found to be present in all fractions that contain the membrane component, suggesting that P501S may be associated with plasma membrane of the insect cells expressing the recombinant protein.

C) Expression of P501S in Mammalian Cells

Full-length P501S (553AA) was cloned into various mammalian expression vectors, including pCEP4 (Invitrogen), pVR1012 (Vical, San Diego, Calif.) and a modified form of the retroviral vector pBMN, referred to as pBIB. Transfection of P501S/pCEP4 and P501S/pVR1012 into HEK293 fibroblasts was carried out using the Fugene transfection reagent (Boehringer Mannheim). Briefly, 2 ul of Fugene reagent was diluted into 100 ul of serum-free media and incubated at room temperature for 5-10 min. This mixture was added to 1 ug of P501S plasmid DNA, mixed briefly and incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature. The Fugene/DNA mixture was added to cells and incubated for 24-48 hours. Expression of recombinant P501S in transfected HEK293 fibroblasts was detected by means of Western blot employing a monoclonal antibody to P501S.

Transfection of p501S/pCEP4 into CHO-K cells (American Type Culture Collection, Rockville, Md.) was carried out using GenePorter transfection reagent (Gene Therapy Systems, San Diego, Calif.). Briefly, 15 μl of GenePorter was diluted in 500 μl of serum-free media and incubated at room temperature for 10 min. The GenePorter/media mixture was added to 2 μg of plasmid DNA that was diluted in 500 μl of serum-free media, mixed briefly and incubated for 30 min at room temperature. CHO-K cells were rinsed in PBS to remove serum proteins, and the GenePorter/DNA mix was added and incubated for 5 hours. The transfected cells were then fed an equal volume of 2× media and incubated for 24-48 hours.

FACS analysis of P501S transiently infected CHO-K cells, demonstrated surface expression of P501S. Expression was detected using rabbit polyclonal antisera raised against a P501S peptide, as described below. Flow cytometric analysis was performed using a FaCScan (Becton Dickinson), and the data were analyzed using the Cell Quest program.

EXAMPLE 18 Preparation and Characterization of Antibodies Against Prostate-Specific Polypeptides

A) Preparation and Characterization of Polyclonal Antibodies Against P703P, P504S AND P509S

Polyclonal antibodies against P703P, P504S and P509S were prepared as follows.

Each prostate tumor antigen expressed in an E. coli recombinant expression system was grown overnight in LB broth with the appropriate antibiotics at 37° C. in a shaking incubator. The next morning, 10 ml of the overnight culture was added to 500 ml to 2×YT plus appropriate antibiotics in a 2L-baffled Erlenmeyer flask. When the Optical Density (at 560 nm) of the culture reached 0.4-0.6, the cells were induced with IPTG (1 mM). Four hours after induction with IPTG, the cells were harvested by centrifugation. The cells were then washed with phosphate buffered saline and centrifuged again. The supernatant was discarded and the cells were either frozen for future use or immediately processed. Twenty ml of lysis buffer was added to the cell pellets and vortexed. To break open the E. coli cells, this mixture was then run through the French Press at a pressure of 16,000 psi. The cells were then centrifuged again and the supernatant and pellet were checked by SDS-PAGE for the partitioning of the recombinant protein. For proteins that localized to the cell pellet, the pellet was resuspended in 10 mM Tris pH 8.0, 1% CHAPS and the inclusion body pellet was washed and centrifuged again. This procedure was repeated twice more. The washed inclusion body pellet was solubilized with either 8 M urea or 6 M guanidine HCl containing 10 mM Tris pH 8.0 plus 10 mM imidazole. The solubilized protein was added to 5 ml of nickel-chelate resin (Qiagen) and incubated for 45 min to 1 hour at room temperature with continuous agitation. After incubation, the resin and protein mixture were poured through a disposable column and the flow through was collected. The column was then washed with 10-20 column volumes of the solubilization buffer. The antigen was then eluted from the column using 8M urea, 10 mM Tris pH 8.0 and 300 mM imidazole and collected in 3 ml fractions. A SDS-PAGE gel was run to determine which fractions to pool for further purification.

As a final purification step, a strong anion exchange resin such as HiPrepQ (Biorad) was equilibrated with the appropriate buffer and the pooled fractions from above were loaded onto the column. Each antigen was eluted off the column with a increasing salt gradient. Fractions were collected as the column was run and another SDS-PAGE gel was run to determine which fractions from the column to pool. The pooled fractions were dialyzed against 10 mM Tris pH 8.0. The proteins were then vialed after filtration through a 0.22 micron filter and the antigens were frozen until needed for immunization.

Four hundred micrograms of each prostate antigen was combined with 100 micrograms of muramyldipeptide (MDP). Every four weeks rabbits were boosted with 100 micrograms mixed with an equal volume of Incomplete Freund's Adjuvant (IFA). Seven days following each boost, the animal was bled. Sera was generated by incubating the blood at 4° C. for 12-4 hours followed by centrifugation.

Ninety-six well plates were coated with antigen by incubating with 50 microliters (typically 1 microgram) of recombinant protein at 4° C. for 20 hours. 250 microliters of BSA blocking buffer was added to the wells and incubated at room temperature for 2 hours. Plates were washed 6 times with PBS/0.01% Tween. Rabbit sera was diluted in PBS. Fifty microliters of diluted sera was added to each well and incubated at room temperature for 30 min. Plates were washed as described above before 50 microliters of goat anti-rabbit horse radish peroxidase (HRP) at a 1:10000 dilution was added and incubated at room temperature for 30 min. Plates were again washed as described above and 100 microliters of TMB microwell peroxidase substrate was added to each well. Following a 15 min incubation in the dark at room temperature, the colorimetric reaction was stopped with 100 microliters of 1N H₂SO₄ and read immediately at 450 nm. All polyclonal antibodies showed immunoreactivity to the appropriate antigen.

B) Preparation and Characterization of Antibodies Against P501S

A murine monoclonal antibody directed against the carboxy-terminus of the prostate-specific antigen P501S was prepared as follows.

A truncated fragment of P501S (amino acids 355-526 of SEQ ID NO: 113) was generated and cloned into the pET28b vector (Novagen) and expressed in E. coli as a thioredoxin fusion protein with a histidine tag. The trx-P501S fusion protein was purified by nickel chromatography, digested with thrombin to remove the trx fragment and further purified by an acid precipitation procedure followed by reverse phase HPLC.

Mice were immunized with truncated P501S protein. Serum bleeds from mice that potentially contained anti-P501S polyclonal sera were tested for P501S-specific reactivity using ELISA assays with purified P501S and trx-P501S proteins. Serum bleeds that appeared to react specifically with P501S were then screened for P501S reactivity by Western analysis. Mice that contained a P501S-specific antibody component were sacrificed and spleen cells were used to generate anti-P501S antibody producing hybridomas using standard techniques. Hybridoma supernatants were tested for P501S-specific reactivity initially by ELISA, and subsequently by FACS analysis of reactivity with P501S transduced cells. Based on these results, a monoclonal hybridoma referred to as 10E3 was chosen for further subcloning. A number of subclones were generated, tested for specific reactivity to P501S using ELISA and typed for IgG isotype. The results of this analysis are shown below in Table V. Of the 16 subclones tested, the monoclonal antibody 10E3-G4-D3 was selected for further study.

TABLE V Isotype analysis of murine anti-P501S monoclonal antibodies Hybridoma clone Isotype Estimated [Ig] in supernatant (μg/ml) 4D11 IgG1 14.6 1G1 IgG1 0.6 4F6 IgG1 72 4H5 IgG1 13.8 4H5-E12 IgG1 10.7 4H5-EH2 IgG1 9.2 4H5-H2-A10 IgG1 10 4H5-H2-A3 IgG1 12.8 4H5-H2-A10-G6 IgG1 13.6 4H5-H2-B11 IgG1 12.3 10E3 IgG2a 3.4 10E3-D4 IgG2a 3.8 10E3-D4-G3 IgG2a 9.5 10E3-D4-G6 IgG2a 10.4 10E3-E7 IgG2a 6.5 8H12 IgG2a 0.6

The specificity of 10E3-G4-D3 for P501S was examined by FACS analysis. Specifically, cells were fixed (2% formaldehyde, 10 minutes), permeabilized (0.1% saponin, 10 minutes) and stained with 10E3-G4-D3 at 0.5-1 μg/ml, followed by incubation with a secondary, FITC-conjugated goat anti-mouse Ig antibody (Pharmingen, San Diego, Calif.). Cells were then analyzed for FITC fluorescence using an Excalibur fluorescence activated cell sorter. For FACS analysis of transduced cells, B-LCL were retrovirally transduced with P501S. For analysis of infected cells, B-LCL were infected with a vaccinia vector that expresses P501S. To demonstrate specificity in these assays, B-LCL transduced with a different antigen (P703P) and uninfected B-LCL vectors were utilized. 10E3-G4-D3 was shown to bind with P501S-transduced B-LCL and also with P501S-infected B-LCL, but not with either uninfected cells or P703P-transduced cells.

To determine whether the epitope recognized by 10E3-G4-D3 was found on the surface or in an intracellular compartment of cells, B-LCL were transduced with P501S or HLA-B8 as a control antigen and either fixed and permeabilized as described above or directly stained with 10E3-G4-D3 and analyzed as above. Specific recognition of P501S by 10E3-G4-D3 was found to require permeabilization, suggesting that the epitope recognized by this antibody is intracellular.

The reactivity of 10E3-G4-D3 with the three prostate tumor cell lines Lncap, PC-3 and DU-145, which are known to express high, medium and very low levels of P501S, respectively, was examined by permeabilizing the cells and treating them as described above. Higher reactivity of 10E3-G4-D3 was seen with Lncap than with PC-3, which in turn showed higher reactivity that DU-145. These results are in agreement with the real time PCR and demonstrate that the antibody specifically recognizes P501S in these tumor cell lines and that the epitope recognized in prostate tumor cell lines is also intracellular.

Specificity of 10E3-G4-D3 for P501S was also demonstrated by Western blot analysis. Lysates from the prostate tumor cell lines Lncap, DU-145 and PC-3, from P501S-transiently transfected HEK293 cells, and from non-transfected HEK293 cells were generated. Western blot analysis of these lysates with 10E3-G4-D3 revealed a 46 kDa immunoreactive band in Lncap, PC-3 and P501S-transfected HEK cells, but not in DU-145 cells or non-transfected HEK293 cells. P501S mRNA expression is consistent with these results since semi-quantitative PCR analysis revealed that P501S mRNA is expressed in Lncap, to a lesser but detectable level in PC-3 and not at all in DU-145 cells. Bacterially expressed and purified recombinant P501S (referred to as P501SStr2) was recognized by 10E3-G4-D3 (24 kDa), as was full-length P501S that was transiently expressed in HEK293 cells using either the expression vector VR1012 or pCEP4. Although the predicted molecular weight of P501S is 60.5 kDa, both transfected and “native” P501S run at a slightly lower mobility due to its hydrophobic nature.

Immunohistochemical analysis was performed on prostate tumor and a panel of normal tissue sections (prostate, adrenal, breast, cervix, colon, duodenum, gall bladder, ileum, kidney, ovary, pancreas, parotid gland, skeletal muscle, spleen and testis). Tissue samples were fixed in formalin solution for 24 hours and embedded in paraffin before being sliced into 10 micron sections. Tissue sections were permeabilized and incubated with 10E3-G4-D3 antibody for 1 hr. HRP-labeled anti-mouse followed by incubation with DAB chromogen was used to visualize P501S immunoreactivity. P501S was found to be highly expressed in both normal prostate and prostate tumor tissue but was not detected in any of the other tissues tested.

To identify the epitope recognized by 10E3-G4-D3, an epitope mapping approach was pursued. A series of 13 overlapping 20-21 mers (5 amino acid overlap; SEQ ID NO: 489-501) was synthesized that spanned the fragment of P501S used to generate 10E3-G4-D3. Flat bottom 96 well microtiter plates were coated with either the peptides or the P501S fragment used to immunize mice, at 1 microgram/ml for 2 hours at 37° C. Wells were then aspirated and blocked with phosphate buffered saline containing 1% (w/v) BSA for 2 hours at room temperature, and subsequently washed in PBS containing 0.1% Tween 20 (PBST). Purified antibody 10E3-G4-D3 was added at 2 fold dilutions (1000 ng-16 ng) in PBST and incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature. This was followed by washing 6 times with PBST and subsequently incubating with HRP-conjugated donkey anti-mouse IgG (H+L) Affinipure F(ab′) fragment (Jackson Immunoresearch, West Grove, Pa.) at 1:20000 for 30 minutes. Plates were then washed and incubated for 15 minutes in tetramethyl benzidine. Reactions were stopped by the addition of 1N sulfuric acid and plates were read at 450 nm using an ELISA plate reader. As shown in FIG. 8, reactivity was seen with the peptide of SEQ ID NO: 496 (corresponding to amino acids 439-459 of P501S) and with the P501S fragment but not with the remaining peptides, demonstrating that the epitope recognized by 10E3-G4-D3 is localized to amino acids 439-459 of SEQ ID NO: 113.

In order to further evaluate the tissue specificity of P501S, multi-array immunohistochemical analysis was performed on approximately 4700 different human tissues encompassing all the major normal organs as well as neoplasias derived from these tissues. Sixty-five of these human tissue samples were of prostate origin. Tissue sections 0.6 mm in diameter were formalin-fixed and paraffin embedded. Samples were pretreated with HIER using 10 mM citrate buffer pH 6.0 and boiling for 10 min. Sections were stained with 10E3-G4-D3 and P501S immunoreactivity was visualized with HRP. All the 65 prostate tissues samples (5 normal, 55 untreated prostate tumors, 5 hormone refractory prostate tumors) were positive, showing distinct perinuclear staining. All other tissues examined were negative for P501S expression.

C) Preparation and Characterization of Antibodies Against P503S

A fragment of P503S (amino acids 113-241 of SEQ ID NO: 114) was expressed and purified from bacteria essentially as described above for P501S and used to immunize both rabbits and mice. Mouse monoclonal antibodies were isolated using standard hybridoma technology as described above. Rabbit monoclonal antibodies were isolated using Selected Lymphocyte Antibody Method (SLAM) technology at Immgenics Pharmaceuticals (Vancouver, BC, Canada). Table VI, below, lists the monoclonal antibodies that were developed against P503S.

TABLE VI Antibody Species 20D4 Rabbit JA1 Rabbit 1A4 Mouse 1C3 Mouse 1C9 Mouse 1D12 Mouse 2A11 Mouse 2H9 Mouse 4H7 Mouse 8A8 Mouse 8D10 Mouse 9C12 Mouse 6D12 Mouse

The DNA sequences encoding the complementarity determining regions (CDRs) for the rabbit monoclonal antibodies 20D4 and JA1 were determined and are provided in SEQ ID NO: 502 and 503, respectively.

In order to better define the epitope binding region of each of the antibodies, a series of overlapping peptides were generated that span amino acids 109-213 of SEQ ID NO: 114. These peptides were used to epitope map the anti-P503S monoclonal antibodies by ELISA as follows. The recombinant fragment of P503S that was employed as the immunogen was used as a positive control. Ninety-six well microtiter plates were coated with either peptide or recombinant antigen at 20 ng/well overnight at 4° C. Plates were aspirated and blocked with phosphate buffered saline containing 1% (w/v) BSA for 2 hours at room temperature then washed in PBS containing 0.1% Tween 20 (PBST). Purified rabbit monoclonal antibodies diluted in PBST were added to the wells and incubated for 30 min at room temperature. This was followed by washing 6 times with PBST and incubation with Protein-A HRP conjugate at a 1:2000 dilution for a further 30 min. Plates were washed six times in PBST and incubated with tetramethylbenzidine (TMB) substrate for a further 15 min. The reaction was stopped by the addition of 1N sulfuric acid and plates were read at 450 nm using at ELISA plate reader. ELISA with the mouse monoclonal antibodies was performed with supernatants from tissue culture run neat in the assay.

All of the antibodies bound to the recombinant P503S fragment, with the exception of the negative control SP2 supernatant. 20D4, JA1 and 1D12 bound strictly to peptide #2101 (SEQ ID NO: 504), which corresponds to amino acids 151-169 of SEQ ID NO: 114. 1C3 bound to peptide #2102 (SEQ ID NO: 505), which corresponds to amino acids 165-184 of SEQ ID NO: 114. 9C12 bound to peptide #2099 (SEQ ID NO: 522), which corresponds to amino acids 120-139 of SEQ ID NO: 114. The other antibodies bind to regions that were not examined in these studies.

Subsequent to epitope mapping, the antibodies were tested by FACS analysis on a cell line that stably expressed P503S to confirm that the antibodies bind to cell surface epitopes. Cells stably transfected with a control plasmid were employed as a negative control. Cells were stained live with no fixative. 0.5 ug of anti-P503S monoclonal antibody was added and cells were incubated on ice for 30 min before being washed twice and incubated with a FITC-labelled goat anti-rabbit or mouse secondary antibody for 20 min. After being washed twice, cells were analyzed with an Excalibur fluorescent activated cell sorter. The monoclonal antibodies 1C3, 1D12, 9C12, 20D4 and JA1, but not 8D3, were found to bind to a cell surface epitope of P503S.

In order to determine which tissues express P503S, immunohistochemical analysis was performed, essentially as described above, on a panel of normal tissues (prostate, adrenal, breast, cervix, colon, duodenum, gall bladder, ileum, kidney, ovary, pancreas, parotid gland, skeletal muscle, spleen and testis). HRP-labeled anti-mouse or anti-rabbit antibody followed by incubation with TMB was used to visualize P503S immunoreactivity. P503S was found to be highly expressed in prostate tissue, with lower levels of expression being observed in cervix, colon, ileum and kidney, and no expression being observed in adrenal, breast, duodenum, gall bladder, ovary, pancreas, parotid gland, skeletal muscle, spleen and testis.

Western blot analysis was used to characterize anti-P503S monoclonal antibody specificity. SDS-PAGE was performed on recombinant (rec) P503S expressed in and purified from bacteria and on lysates from HEK293 cells transfected with full length P503S. Protein was transferred to nitrocellulose and then Western blotted with each of the anti-P503S monoclonal antibodies (20D4, JA1, 1D12, 6D12 and 9C12) at an antibody concentration of 1 ug/ml. Protein was detected using horse radish peroxidase (HRP) conjugated to either a goat anti-mouse monoclonal antibody or to protein A-sepharose. The monoclonal antibody 20D4 detected the appropriate molecular weight 14 kDa recombinant P503S (amino acids 113-241) and the 23.5 kDa species in the HEK293 cell lysates transfected with full length P503S. Other anti-P503S monoclonal antibodies displayed similar specificity by Western blot.

D) Preparation and Characterization of Antibodies Against P703P

Rabbits were immunized with either a truncated (P703Ptr1; SEQ ID NO: 172) or full-length mature form (P703Pfl; SEQ ID NO: 523) of recombinant P703P protein was expressed in and purified from bacteria as described above. Affinity purified polyclonal antibody was generated using immunogen P703Pfl or P703Ptr1 attached to a solid support. Rabbit monoclonal antibodies were isolated using SLAM technology at Immgenics Pharmaceuticals. Table VII below lists both the polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies that were generated against P703P.

TABLE VII Antibody Immunogen Species/type Aff. Purif. P703P (truncated); #2594 P703Ptrl Rabbit polyclonal Aff. Purif. P703P (full length); #9245 P703Pfl Rabbit polyclonal 2D4 P703Ptrl Rabbit monoclonal 8H2 P703Ptrl Rabbit monoclonal 7H8 P703Ptrl Rabbit monoclonal

The DNA sequences encoding the complementarity determining regions (CDRs) for the rabbit monoclonal antibodies 8H2, 7H8 and 2D4 were determined and are provided in SEQ ID NO: 506-508, respectively.

Epitope mapping studies were performed as described above. Monoclonal antibodies 2D4 and 7H8 were found to specifically bind to the peptides of SEQ ID NO: 509 (corresponding to amino acids 145-159 of SEQ ID NO: 172) and SEQ ID NO: 510 (corresponding to amino acids 11-25 of SEQ ID NO: 172), respectively. The polyclonal antibody 2594 was found to bind to the peptides of SEQ ID NO: 511-514, with the polyclonal antibody 9427 binding to the peptides of SEQ ID NO: 515-517.

The specificity of the anti-P703P antibodies was determined by Western blot analysis as follows. SDS-PAGE was performed on (1) bacterially expressed recombinant antigen; (2) lysates of HEK293 cells and Ltk−/− cells either untransfected or transfected with a plasmid expressing full length P703P; and (3) supernatant isolated from these cell cultures. Protein was transferred to nitrocellulose and then Western blotted using the anti-P703P polyclonal antibody #2594 at an antibody concentration of 1 ug/ml. Protein was detected using horse radish peroxidase (HRP) conjugated to an anti-rabbit antibody. A 35 kDa immunoreactive band could be observed with recombinant P703P. Recombinant P703P runs at a slightly higher molecular weight since it is epitope tagged. In lysates and supernatants from cells transfected with full length P703P, a 30 kDa band corresponding to P703P was observed. To assure specificity, lysates from HEK293 cells stably transfected with a control plasmid were also tested and were negative for P703P expression. Other anti-P703P antibodies showed similar results.

Immunohistochemical studies were performed as described above, using anti-P703P monoclonal antibody. P703P was found to be expressed at high levels in normal prostate and prostate tumor tissue but was not detectable in all other tissues tested (breast tumor, lung tumor and normal kidney).

EXAMPLE 19 Characterization of Cell Surface Expression and Chromosome Localization of the Prostate-Specific Antigen P501S

This example describes studies demonstrating that the prostate-specific antigen P501S is expressed on the surface of cells, together with studies to determine the probable chromosomal location of P501S.

The protein P501S (SEQ ID NO: 113) is predicted to have 11 transmembrane domains. Based on the discovery that the epitope recognized by the anti-P501S monoclonal antibody 10E3-G4-D3 (described above in Example 17) is intracellular, it was predicted that following transmembrane determinants would allow the prediction of extracellular domains of P501S. FIG. 9 is a schematic representation of the P501S protein showing the predicted location of the transmembrane domains and the intracellular epitope described in Example 17. Underlined sequence represents the predicted transmembrane domains, bold sequence represents the predicted extracellular domains, and italicized sequence represents the predicted intracellular domains. Sequence that is both bold and underlined represents sequence employed to generate polyclonal rabbit serum. The location of the transmembrane domains was predicted using HHMTOP as described by Tusnady and Simon (Principles Governing Amino Acid Composition of Integral Membrane Proteins: Applications to Topology Prediction, J. Mol. Biol. 283:489-506, 1998).

Based on FIG. 9, the P501S domain flanked by the transmembrane domains corresponding to amino acids 274-295 and 323-342 is predicted to be extracellular. The peptide of SEQ ID NO: 518 corresponds to amino acids 306-320 of P501S and lies in the predicted extracellular domain. The peptide of SEQ ID NO: 519, which is identical to the peptide of SEQ ID NO: 518 with the exception of the substitution of the histidine with an asparginine, was synthesized as described above. A Cys-Gly was added to the C-terminus of the peptide to facilitate conjugation to the carrier protein. Cleavage of the peptide from the solid support was carried out using the following cleavage mixture: trifluoroacetic acid:ethanediol:thioanisol:water:phenol (40:1:2:2:3). After cleaving for two hours, the peptide was precipitated in cold ether. The peptide pellet was then dissolved in 10% v/v acetic acid and lyophilized prior to purification by C18 reverse phase hplc. A gradient of 5-60% acetonitrile (containing 0.05% TFA) in water (containing 0.05% TFA) was used to elute the peptide. The purity of the peptide was verified by hplc and mass spectrometry, and was determined to be >95%. The purified peptide was used to generate rabbit polyclonal antisera as described above.

Surface expression of P501S was examined by FACS analysis. Cells were stained with the polyclonal anti-P501S peptide serum at 10 μg/ml, washed, incubated with a secondary FITC-conjugated goat anti-rabbit Ig antibody (ICN), washed and analyzed for FITC fluorescence using an Excalibur fluorescence activated cell sorter. For FACS analysis of transduced cells, B-LCL were retrovirally transduced with P501S. To demonstrate specificity in these assays, B-LCL transduced with an irrelevant antigen (P703P) or nontransduced were stained in parallel. For FACS analysis of prostate tumor cell lines, Lncap, PC-3 and DU-145 were utilized. Prostate tumor cell lines were dissociated from tissue culture plates using cell dissociation medium and stained as above. All samples were treated with propidium iodide (PI) prior to FACS analysis, and data was obtained from PI-excluding (i.e., intact and non-permeabilized) cells. The rabbit polyclonal serum generated against the peptide of SEQ ID NO: 519 was shown to specifically recognize the surface of cells transduced to express P501S, demonstrating that the epitope recognized by the polyclonal serum is extracellular.

To determine biochemically if P501S is expressed on the cell surface, peripheral membranes from Lncap cells were isolated and subjected to Western blot analysis. Specifically, Lncap cells were lysed using a dounce homogenizer in 5 ml of homogenization buffer (250 mM sucrose, 10 mM HEPES, 1 mM EDTA, pH 8.0, 1 complete protease inhibitor tablet (Boehringer Mannheim)). Lysate samples were spun at 1000 g for 5 min at 4° C. The supernatant was then spun at 8000 g for 10 min at 4° C. Supernatant from the 8000 g spin was recovered and subjected to a 100,000 g spin for 30 min at 4° C. to recover peripheral membrane. Samples were then separated by SDS-PAGE and Western blotted with the mouse monoclonal antibody 10E3-G4-D3 (described above in Example 17) using conditions described above. Recombinant purified P501S, as well as HEK293 cells transfected with and over-expressing P501S were included as positive controls for P501S detection. LCL cell lysate was included as a negative control. P501S could be detected in Lncap total cell lysate, the 8000 g (internal membrane) fraction and also in the 100,000 g (plasma membrane) fraction. These results indicate that P501S is expressed at, and localizes to, the peripheral membrane.

To demonstrate that the rabbit polyclonal antiserum generated to the peptide of SEQ ID NO: 519 specifically recognizes this peptide as well as the corresponding native peptide of SEQ ID NO: 518, ELISA analyses were performed. For these analyses, flat-bottomed 96 well microtiter plates were coated with either the peptide of SEQ ID NO: 519, the longer peptide of SEQ ID NO: 520 that spans the entire predicted extracellular domain, the peptide of SEQ ID NO: 521 which represents the epitope recognized by the P501S-specific antibody 10E3-G4-D3, or a P501S fragment (corresponding to amino acids 355-526 of SEQ ID NO: 113) that does not include the immunizing peptide sequence, at 1 μg/ml for 2 hours at 37° C. Wells were aspirated, blocked with phosphate buffered saline containing 1% (w/v) BSA for 2 hours at room temperature and subsequently washed in PBS containing 0.1% Tween 20 (PBST). Purified anti-P501S polyclonal rabbit serum was added at 2 fold dilutions (1000 ng −125 ng) in PBST and incubated for 30 min at room temperature. This was followed by washing 6 times with PBST and incubating with HRP-conjugated goat anti-rabbit IgG (H+L) Affinipure F(ab′) fragment at 1:20000 for 30 min. Plates were then washed and incubated for 15 min in tetramethyl benzidine. Reactions were stopped by the addition of 1N sulfuric acid and plates were read at 450 nm using an ELISA plate reader. As shown in FIG. 11, the anti-P501S polyclonal rabbit serum specifically recognized the peptide of SEQ ID NO: 519 used in the immunization as well as the longer peptide of SEQ ID NO: 520, but did not recognize the irrelevant P501S-derived peptides and fragments.

In further studies, rabbits were immunized with peptides derived from the P501S sequence and predicted to be either extracellular or intracellular, as shown in FIG. 9. Polyclonal rabbit sera were isolated and polyclonal antibodies in the serum were purified, as described above. To determine specific reactivity with P501S, FACS analysis was employed, utilizing either B-LCL transduced with P501S or the irrelevant antigen P703P, of B-LCL infected with vaccinia virus-expressing P501S. For surface expression, dead and non-intact cells were excluded from the analysis as described above. For intracellular staining, cells were fixed and permeabilized as described above. Rabbit polyclonal serum generated against the peptide of SEQ ID NO: 548, which corresponds to amino acids 181-198 of P501S, was found to recognize a surface epitope of P501S. Rabbit polyclonal serum generated against the peptide SEQ ID NO: 551, which corresponds to amino acids 543-553 of P501S, was found to recognize an epitope that was either potentially extracellular or intracellular since in different experiments intact or permeabilized cells were recognized by the polyclonal sera. Based on similar deductive reasoning, the sequences of SEQ ID NO: 541-547, 549 and 550, which correspond to amino acids 109-122, 539-553, 509-520, 37-54, 342-359, 295-323, 217-274, 143-160 and 75-88, respectively, of P501S, can be considered to be potential surface epitopes of P501S recognized by antibodies.

The chromosomal location of P501S was determined using the GeneBridge 4 Radiation Hybrid panel (Research Genetics). The PCR primers of SEQ ID NO: 528 and 529 were employed in PCR with DNA pools from the hybrid panel according to the manufacturer's directions. After 38 cycles of amplification, the reaction products were separated on a 1.2% agarose gel, and the results were analyzed through the Whitehead Institute/MIT Center for Genome Research web server to determine the probable chromosomal location. Using this approach, P501S was mapped to the long arm of chromosome 1 at WI-9641 between q32 and q42. This region of chromosome 1 has been linked to prostate cancer susceptibility in hereditary prostate cancer (Smith et al. Science 274:1371-1374, 1996 and Berthon et al. Am. J. Hum. Genet. 62:1416-1424, 1998). These results suggest that P501S may play a role in prostate cancer malignancy.

EXAMPLE 20 Regulation of Expression of the Prostate-Specific Antigen P501S

Steroid (androgen) hormone modulation is a common treatment modality in prostate cancer. The expression of a number of prostate tissue-specific antigens have previously been demonstrated to respond to androgen. The responsiveness of the prostate-specific antigen P501S to androgen treatment was examined in a tissue culture system as follows.

Cells from the prostate tumor cell line LNCaP were plated at 1.5×10⁶ cells/T75 flask (for RNA isolation) or 3×10⁵ cells/well of a 6-well plate (for FACS analysis) and grown overnight in RPMI 1640 media containing 10% charcoal-stripped fetal calf serum (BRL Life Technologies, Gaithersburg, Md.). Cell culture was continued for an additional 72 hours in RPMI 1640 media containing 10% charcoal-stripped fetal calf serum, with 1 nM of the synthetic androgen Methyltrienolone (R1881; New England Nuclear) added at various time points. Cells were then harvested for RNA isolation and FACS analysis at 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 24, 28 and 72-hours post androgen addition. FACS analysis was performed using the anti-P501S antibody 10E3-G4-D3 and permeabilized cells.

For Northern analysis, 5-10 micrograms of total RNA was run on a formaldehyde denaturing gel, transferred to Hybond-N nylon membrane (Amersham Pharmacia Biotech, Piscataway, N.J.), cross-linked and stained with methylene blue. The filter was then prehybridized with Church's Buffer (250 mM Na₂HPO₄, 70 mM H₃PO₄, 1 mM EDTA, 1% SDS, 1% BSA in pH 7.2) at 65° C. for 1 hour. P501S DNA was labeled with 32P using High Prime random-primed DNA labeling kit (Boehringer Mannheim). Unincorporated label was removed using MicroSpin S300-HR columns (Amersham Pharmacia Biotech). The RNA filter was then hybridized with fresh Church's Buffer containing labeled cDNA overnight, washed with 1×SCP (0.1 M NaCl, 0.03 M Na₂HPO₄.7H₂O, 0.001 M Na₂EDTA), 1% sarkosyl (n-lauroylsarcosine) and exposed to X-ray film.

Using both FACS and Northern analysis, P501S message and protein levels were found in increase in response to androgen treatment.

EXAMPLE 20 Preparation of Fusion Proteins of Prostate-Specific Antigens

The example describes the preparation of a fusion protein of the prostate-specific antigen P703P and a truncated form of the known prostate antigen PSA. The truncated form of PSA has a 21 amino acid deletion around the active serine site. The expression construct for the fusion protein also has a restriction site at 3′ end, immediately prior to the termination codon, to aid in adding cDNA for additional antigens.

The full-length cDNA for PSA was obtained by RT-PCR from a pool of RNA from human prostate tumor tissues using the primers of SEQ ID NO: 607 and 608, and cloned in the vector pCR-Blunt II-TOPO. The resulting cDNA was employed as a template to make two different fragments of PSA by PCR with two sets of primers (SEQ ID NO: 609 and 610; and SEQ ID NO: 611 and 612). The PCR products having the expected size were used as templates to make truncated forms of PSA by PCR with the primers of SEQ ID NO: 611 and 613, which generated PSA (delta 208-218 in amino acids). The cDNA for the mature form of P703P with a 6× histidine tag at the 5′ end, was prepared by PCR with P703P and the primers of SEQ ID NO: 614 and 615. The cDNA for the fusion of P703P with the truncated form of PSA (referred to as FOPP) was then obtained by PCR using the modified P703P cDNA and the truncated form of PSA cDNA as templates and the primers of SEQ ID NO: 614 and 615. The FOPP cDNA was cloned into the NdeI site and XhoI site of the expression vector pCRX1, and confirmed by DNA sequencing. The determined cDNA sequence for the fusion construct FOPP is provided in SEQ ID NO: 616, with the amino acid sequence being provided in SEQ ID NO: 617.

EXAMPLE 21 Real-Time PCR Characterization of the Prostate-Specific Antigen P501S in Peripheral Blood of Prostate Cancer Patients

Circulating epithelial cells were isolated from fresh blood of normal individuals and metastatic prostate cancer patients, mRNA isolated and cDNA prepared using real-time PCR procedures. Real-time PCR was performed with the Taqman™ procedure using both gene specific primers and probes to determine the levels of gene expression.

Epithelial cells were enriched from blood samples using an immunomagnetic bead separation method (Dynal A. S., Oslo, Norway). Isolated cells were lysed and the magnetic beads removed. The lysate was then processed for poly A+ mRNA isolation using magnetic beads coated with Oligo(dT)25. After washing the beads in buffer, bead/poly A+ RNA samples were suspended in 10 mM Tris HCl pH 8.0 and subjected to reversed transcription. The resulting cDNA was subjected to real-time PCR using gene specific primers. Beta-actin content was also determined and used for normalization. Samples with P501S copies greater than the mean of the normal samples +3 standard deviations were considered positive. Real time PCR on blood samples was performed using the Taqman™ procedure but extending to 50 cycles using forward and reverse primers and probes specific for P501S. Of the eight samples tested, 6 were positive for P501S and β-actin signal. The remaining 2 samples had no detectable β-actin or P501S, No P501S signal was observed in the four normal blood samples tested.

From the foregoing, it will be appreciated that, although specific embodiments of the invention have been described herein for the purposes of illustration, various modifications may be made without deviating from the spirit and scope of the invention. Accordingly, the present invention is not limited except as by the appended claims. 

1. An immunogenic composition comprising an immunostimulant which induces a predominantly Th1-type immune response and a polypeptide, wherein the polypeptide comprises SEQ ID NO: 113, and wherein the polypeptide stimulates a human cytotoxic T lymphocyte response specific for SEQ ID NO:
 113. 2. The immunogenic composition according to claim 1, wherein the immunostimulant is selected from the group consisting of monophosphoryl lipid A 3-de-O-acylated monophosphoryl lipid A and saponins.
 3. The immunogenic composition according to claim 1, wherein the immunostimulant is an adjuvant. 